Genrakode ™

Hardware Manual
Track Circuit and
Communications System

Installation l Operation l Maintenance

P2160A Volume 1 of 2, Rev. June/03
 Genrakode ™

Hardware Manual
Track Circuit and
Communications System

© 2003 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Installation l Operation l Maintenance

P2160A Volume 1 of 2, Rev. June/03

REVISION LOG

Date Description TP&T Rep. Project Manager Project Engineer

Mo/Year Name Date Name Date
Feb. 1998 Revised JMF

June 2003 Revised N/A JBB 06/30/03 HWM 06/30/03

 PREFACE

INTRODUCTION

This Manual describes the Genrakode™ system concepts, modules, boards,

installation/adjustment, troubleshooting/diagnostics, and electrical characteristics.

The Genrakode system is a line of microprocessor-based equipment for the detection of trains,
vital communication through the rails, and cab signaling.

Section 1 – Introduction: Describes the Genrakode in brief and lists features of the system.

Section 2 - System Concepts and Microprocessor Safety Design: Describes Genrakode

concepts, gives code definitions, code signal timing diagrams, and describes microprocessor
Safety Assurance Logic concepts for vital system operation.

Section 3 - Control Point Module: Describes in detail the Control Point Module operation,
gives the terminal definitions, and information on how to configure and order a Control point
module.

Section 4 - Intermediate Module: Describes the Intermediate Modules’ operation in detail

(color light and search light), addresses stick logic, gives terminal definitions for module, covers
hardware configuration, ordering information and has a detailed configuration and ordering
example.

Section 5 - Repeater Module: Describes the Repeater Module in detail including synchronous
and asynchronous types. This section also gives Repeater terminal definitions and information on
how to configure and order a Repeater Module.

Section 6 - Switch Lock Module: Describes in detail the Switch Lock Module operation, gives
the terminal definitions, addresses the hardware configuration, software options and ordering
information.

Section 7 - Cab Signal Module: Describes the Cab Signal Module, gives module terminal
definitions, and the hardware composition.

Section 8 - Hardware Description: This section contains a description of the Genrakode

Module itself and detailed descriptions of all the circuit boards used in the system.

Section 9 – Installation: Describes the rules to follow when installing a Genrakode module,
initial settings, and final checks.

P2160A Vol. 1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Section 10 - Track Circuit Adjustment: Describes how to adjust track circuits for the
Genrakode system and series overlay equipment.

Section 11 – Maintenance: Outlines a preventive maintenance approach and maintenance test

procedure for the Genrakode system.

Section 12 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics: Describes the troubleshooting procedure and

diagnostics available to a maintainer with a list of error codes. This section also contains
drawings of all the modules showing LED locations and test points.

Appendix A – Specifications: Describes the electrical characteristics of all five Genrakode

modules, list specifications that are common to all modules, lists other various specifications.

Appendix B - Typical Application Circuits: Contains a track layout example and details of
how the Genrakode system is wired up.

Appendix C - Genrakode Test Units: Describes the Genrakode Test Unit and the Track
Current Test Unit and operation instructions for each.

Appendix D - Track Maintenance Log

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Throughout this manual when referencing direction, track designations etc., the words "east" and
"west" are nontraditionally cast in all upper case letters, or capitals, for the purpose of special
emphasis.

In areas where options are presented or discussed, the standard configuration is indicated with an
asterisk.

Related Documentation

The following documents contain information that you may find helpful as you read this manual:

• P2160, Vol. 2 Genrakode Hardware Installation ! Operation ! Maintenance Manual

P2160A Vol. 1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION

GENRAKODE™ SYSTEM...............................................................................................1-1
INTER-OPERABILITY.....................................................................................................1-2

SECTION 2 - SYSTEM CONCEPTS AND MICROPROCESSOR SAFETY DESIGN

SYSTEM CONCEPTS ......................................................................................................2-1

CODE DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................2-1
MICROPROCESSOR SAFETY DESIGN .........................................................................2-7

SECTION 3 - CONTROL POINT MODULE

CONTROL POINT MODULE DESCRIPTION ................................................................3-1

INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD.......................................................................3-2
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS..............................................................................................3-4
HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS................................................................................3-11
SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS...............................................................................3-12
Option 1: Direction....................................................................................................3-12
Option 2: Ouput Type................................................................................................3-12
Option 3: Auxiliary Inputs .........................................................................................3-13
Option 4: Cab Signal .................................................................................................3-13
SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS .....................................................................3-14
ORDERING INFORMATION - CONTROL POINT MODULE......................................3-15

SECTION 4 - INTERMEDIATE MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION (INCLUDING AUX, POWER DETECT)...............................4-1

DIRECTIONAL STICK LOGIC........................................................................................4-2
INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD .......................................................................4-2
COLORLIGHT CONTROL...............................................................................................4-5
SEARCHLIGHT CONTROL.............................................................................................4-5
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS..............................................................................................4-7
HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS................................................................................4-17
SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS...............................................................................4-17
Option 1: Signal Type................................................................................................4-18
Option 2: Approach Lighting .....................................................................................4-18
Option 3: Aspect Flash Rate ......................................................................................4-18
Option 4: Searchlight Light Out .................................................................................4-18

P2160A Vol 1 i ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SECTION 4 - INTERMEDIATE MODULE (cont.)

Option 5: Stick Logic ................................................................................................4-19

Option 6: Stick Qualify Time .....................................................................................4-19
Option 7: Auxiliary Inputs (E Aux, W Aux) ...............................................................4-19
Option 8: Code 5 With Auxiliary Inputs.....................................................................4-20
Option 9: Cab Signal .................................................................................................4-20
Option 10: Cab Signal Turn On .................................................................................4-20
Option 11: Synchronization .......................................................................................4-20
Option 12: Cross Check.............................................................................................4-21
SPECIAL OPTIONS........................................................................................................4-21
SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS .....................................................................4-22
GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUESTIONNAIRE.............................................4-24
GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUESTIONNAIRE.............................................4-25
PROGRAM WORKSHEET EXAMPLE..........................................................................4-26
EXAMPLE: GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUESTIONNAIRE .......................4-28
EXAMPLE: GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUESTIONNAIRE .......................4-29
DESCRIPTION OF CODE & ASPECT CHART FOR COLORLIGHT EXAMPLE ........4-30
East Bound Signal ......................................................................................................4-30
West Bound Signal .....................................................................................................4-31
ORDERING INFORMATION – INTERMEDIATE MODULE.......................................4-32

SECTION 5 - REPEATER MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION................................................................................................5-1
Synchronous Repeater ..................................................................................................5-1
Asynchronous Repeater ................................................................................................5-2
INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD.......................................................................5-2
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS..............................................................................................5-4
HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS..................................................................................5-7
SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS.................................................................................5-7
Option 1: Mode of Operation.......................................................................................5-8
Option 2: Auxiliary Inputs (E Aux, W Aux) .................................................................5-8
Option 3: Code 5 with Auxiliary Inputs........................................................................5-8
Option 4: Cab Signal ...................................................................................................5-9
Option 5: Cab Signal Turn On .....................................................................................5-9
Option 6: Decoded Ouput............................................................................................5-9
SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS .....................................................................5-10
ORDERING INFORMATION – REPEATER MODULE ................................................5-11

P2160A Vol 1 ii ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SECTION 6 - SWITCH LOCK MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................................................6-1

SUMMARY OF SWITCH LOCK MODES: ......................................................................6-2
Switch Lock Timer .......................................................................................................6-3
SWITCH LOCK INPUTS, OUTPUTS AND UNLOCK CODE SELECTION...................6-3
Inputs ...........................................................................................................................6-3
Outputs ........................................................................................................................6-4
Selecting Unlock Codes................................................................................................6-4
INTERPRETING LEDS ON SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD ..............................................6-5
OVERLAY FUNCTION....................................................................................................6-6
INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD.......................................................................6-6
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS..............................................................................................6-9
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................6-13
Switch Lock With Repeater Configurations ................................................................6-13
Optional Boards – Repeater Configurations ................................................................6-13
Switch Lock Without Repeater Configurations ...........................................................6-14
Optional Boards – Without Repeater Configuration ....................................................6-15
SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS...............................................................................6-16
Option 1: Repeater Selection .....................................................................................6-16
Option 2: Lock Timing ..............................................................................................6-17
Option 3: Overlay......................................................................................................6-17
Option 4: Cab Signaling.............................................................................................6-17
Option 5: Cab Signal Turn On ...................................................................................6-17
Option 6: CODE 1 Decoding.....................................................................................6-18
Option 7: Pushbutton Latch Output ...........................................................................6-18
SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS .....................................................................6-19
ORDERING INFORMATION – SWITCH LOCK MODULE .........................................6-20

SECTION 7 - CAB SIGNAL MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION................................................................................................7-1
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS..............................................................................................7-2
HARDWARE COMPOSITION .........................................................................................7-3

SECTION 8 - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

GENERAL MODULE DESCRIPTION .............................................................................8-1

CIRCUIT BOARD.............................................................................................................8-2
Auxiliary I/O Board I 59473-837-01............................................................................8-2
Auxiliary I/O Board II 59473-958-01...........................................................................8-3
Auxiliary I/O Board III 31166-043-01 .........................................................................8-4
Colorlight Driver Board 59473-864-01.........................................................................8-6

P2160A Vol 1 iii ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SECTION 8 - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION (cont.)

Converter/Receiver Board 59473-833-01 .....................................................................8-7

Converter/Receiver Board 59473-833-02 ...................................................................8-10
Central Processing Unit Board 59473-831-01 .............................................................8-11
DC Code Select Input Board 59473-895-01 ...............................................................8-12
Decode/Output Board 59473-838-01..........................................................................8-13
Driver Board 59473-907-01 .......................................................................................8-14
High Power Vital Power Controller (VPC) 59473-872-01 ..........................................8-14
Low Power Vital Power Controller (VPC) 59473-835-01...........................................8-15
Oscillator/Filter 59473-906-01....................................................................................8-16
Regulator/Filter 59473-834-01 ...................................................................................8-17
Relay Code Select Input Board 59473-830-01 ............................................................8-17
Series Overlay Board 59473-877-01 ...........................................................................8-18
Searchlight Driver Board 59473-863-01 .....................................................................8-19
Switch Lock I/O Board 59473-878-01........................................................................8-20
Timer Board 59473-879-01 ........................................................................................8-21

SECTION 9 - INSTALLATION

GENERAL RULES ...........................................................................................................9-1

PRELIMINARY CHECKS AND SETTINGS....................................................................9-1
FINAL CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................9-2
RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION CHECKLIST .........................................................9-4
Safety Critical...............................................................................................................9-4
Operational...................................................................................................................9-4
Not Required................................................................................................................9-5

SECTION 10 - TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

BASIC TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT.....................................................................10-1

BASIC LINE WIRE CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................10-4
Calculating Converter Voltage And Receiver Res. Settings for Line Wire Circuits ......10-7
SERIES OVERLAY TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT................................................10-8
CAB SIGNAL TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT ....................................................... 10-10

SECTION 11 - MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE APPROACH .......................................................................................11-1

TRACK CIRCUIT MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................11-1
RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................11-2
MAINTENANCE TEST PROCEDURE ..........................................................................11-2

P2160A Vol 1 iv ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SECTION 12 - TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................12-1
DIAGNOSTICS...............................................................................................................12-2
System & Application Software Errors .......................................................................12-2
GENRAKODE ERROR CODES .....................................................................................12-6

APPENDIX A

SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................................... A-1
CONTROL POINT MODULE.......................................................................................... A-1
INTERMEDIATE MODULE (SEARCHLIGHT AND COLOR/POSITION LIGHT)....... A-2
REPEATER MODULE..................................................................................................... A-3
Repeater Current Draw................................................................................................ A-3
SWITCH LOCK MODULE .............................................................................................. A-6
CAB SIGNAL MODULE ................................................................................................. A-8
SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL MODULES................................................. A-8
Transmitted Codes....................................................................................................... A-8
Decoding Tolerances ................................................................................................... A-9
Cab Signal Rates........................................................................................................ A-10
Cab Signal Output (E CAB, W CAB) ........................................................................ A-10
Track Length vs. Cab Signal Power Setting ............................................................... A-10
Auxiliary Output (E EXO, W EXO) .......................................................................... A-11
Auxiliary Input (+E AUX, +W AUX) ........................................................................ A-11
Auxiliary Input (E EXI, W EXI) ................................................................................ A-11
AC Power Detect Input ............................................................................................. A-11
Flashing Aspects (Intermediate Module only)............................................................. A-12
Approach Lighting (Intermediate Module only) ......................................................... A-12
Directional Stick Logic (intermediate module only).................................................... A-12
Track Converter Characteristics................................................................................. A-12
Receiver Characteristics............................................................................................. A-13
Recommended Wiring to Module .............................................................................. A-14
Recommended Track/Line Wire Current .................................................................... A-15
Maximum Track Circuit Length (Converter/Receiver Gr. 1 Board) ............................ A-15
Maximum Line Wire Circuit Length (Converter/Receiver Gr. 2 Board)...................... A-17
Lightning Protection ................................................................................................. A-18
Audio Frequency Compatibility.................................................................................. A-18
Environmental ........................................................................................................... A-19
Physical Specifications............................................................................................... A-19
Connections............................................................................................................... A-19
ACCESSORIES.............................................................................................................. A-19
Current Test Board (59473-890-01) .......................................................................... A-19
Extender Board (59473-850-01)................................................................................ A-19

P2160A Vol 1 v ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

APPENDIX A (cont.)

60 Hz Filter (42560-276-01)...................................................................................... A-20

100 Hz Filter (42560-276-02).................................................................................... A-20
Motion Sensor Filter (42560-278-01) ........................................................................ A-20
Track Current Test Unit (20182-100-01) ................................................................... A-20

APPENDIX B

TYPICAL APPLICATION CIRCUITS............................................................................. B-1

APPENDIX C

GENRAKODE TEST UNITS ........................................................................................... C-1

Genrakode Test Unit ................................................................................................... C-1
Interpreting LEDs On CPU Board ............................................................................... C-1
Terminal Definitions .................................................................................................... C-3
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................... C-3
General Information..................................................................................................... C-3
Procedure.................................................................................................................... C-3
TRACK CURRENT TEST UNIT ..................................................................................... C-4
Operating Instructions ................................................................................................. C-5
Maintenance ................................................................................................................ C-5

APPENDIX D

TRACK MAINTENANCE LOG....................................................................................... D-1

P2160A Vol 1 vi ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LIST OF FIGURES

Figure No. Title Page

1-1 Genrakode™ System ........................................................................... 1-2

2-1 Genrakode II Timing (without Code 5) ................................................ 2-3

2-2 Genrakode II Timing (with Code 5) ..................................................... 2-4
2-3 Genrakode II Timing (with Alternating Code 5) .................................. 2-5

3-1 Control Point Module AAR Terminals................................................. 3-10

4-1 Three - and Four - Wire Searchlight Check Circuits............................. 4-6

4-2 Intermediate Module AAR Terminals. ................................................. 4-15
4-3 Connections for Double Track Approach Lighting............................... 4-16

5-1 Repeater Module AAR Terminals ........................................................ 5-6

6-1 Switch Lock Module AAR Terminals .................................................. 6-12

7-1 Cab Signal Module AAR Terminals..................................................... 7-3

9-1 Code 5 Function Setting Switch (SW3) on CPU Board ........................ 9-3

10-1 Series Overlay Adjustment Locations. ................................................. 10-9

10-2 Track Converter/Receiver Board Adjustment Locations....................... 10-11
10-3 Line Wire Converter/Receiver Board Adjustment Locations. ............... 10-12

12-1 LED/Test Point Arrangement Control Point......................................... 12-19

12-2 LED/Test Point Arrangement Intermediate Module ............................. 12-20
12-3 LED/Test Point Arrangement Repeater Module ................................... 12-21
12-4 LED/Test Point Arrangement Switch Lock Module ............................. 12-22
12-5 LED and Test Point Locations for Cab Signal Module Boards ............. 12-23
12-6 LED and Test Point Locations for Test Unit Boards ............................ 12-24

P2160A Vol 1 vii ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LIST OF FIGURES (cont.)

Figure No. Title Page

B-1 Track Layout Example: Code and Aspect Chart................................... B-1
B-2 Location 1: Control Point Module Driving Searchlight Signals............ B-2
B-3 Location 1: Control Point Module Driving Searchlight Signals............ B-3
B-4 Location 2: Intermediate Module Driving Staggered Colorlight Signal B-4
B-5 Location 3: Intermediate Module Driving Staggered Colorlight Signal B-5
B-6 Location 4: Demonstrating Application of Repeater............................. B-6
B-7 Location 5: Intermediate Module Driving Searchlight.......................... B-7
B-8 Location 6: Switchlock Module Application (Typical)......................... B-8
B-9 Location 7: Control Point Module Driving Searchlight Signals............ B-9
B-10 Cab Signal Module Application ........................................................... B-10
B-11 100 Hz External Filter Application ...................................................... B-11

P2160A Vol 1 viii ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LIST OF TABLES

Table No. Title Page

2-1 Clearing Code Characteristics. ............................................................. 2-2

3-1 Control Point Module Components. ..................................................... 3-11

4-1 Intermediate Module Components........................................................ 4-17

5-1 Repeater Module Components. ............................................................ 5-7

6-1 Switch Lock Module Components, With Repeater. ............................. 6-14

6-2 Switch Lock Module Components, Without Repeater. ......................... 6-16

7-1 Cab Signal Module Hardware Composition. ........................................ 7-3

9-1 CPU’s SW3 Setting for Code 5 Transmission/Receive Attributes ........ 9-2

10-1 Converter Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection. ....................................... 10-1

10-2 Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions. .................................. 10-2
10-3 Transmit and Receive Settings for Rail Lengths................................... 10-3
10-4 Track Lead Increases vs. Track Length Reductions.............................. 10-4
10-5 Converter Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection. ....................................... 10-4
10-6 Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions. .................................. 10-5
10-7 Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (6 Gauge). ................ 10-6
10-8 Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (8 Gauge). ................ 10-6
10-9 Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (10 Gauge). .............. 10-7
10-10 Track Length vs. Cab Signal Power Setting ......................................... 10-10

12-1 Faulty Board Identification by CPU LED Indications .......................... 12-5

12-2 Error Code Diagnostics........................................................................ 12-6

A-1 Repeater Current vs. Battery Voltage ................................................... A-4

A-2 Transmit Code Timing......................................................................... A-8
A-3 Transmit Code Tolerances ................................................................... A-9
A-4 Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection for Track Converter......................... A-12
A-5 Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection for Line Wire Converter .................. A-12
A-6 Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions (59473-833-01) ......... A-13

P2160A Vol 1 ix ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LIST OF TABLES (cont.)

Table No. Title Page

A-7 Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions (59473-833-02) ......... A-14
A-8 Transmit and Receive Settings for Rail Lengths................................... A-15
A-9 Track Lead Increases vs. Track Length Reductions.............................. A-16
A-10 Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (6 Gauge) ................. A-17
A-11 Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (8 Gauge) ................. A-17
A-12 Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (10 Gauge) ............... A-18

P2160A Vol 1 x ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION

GENRAKODE™ SYSTEM

The Genrakode™ System is a complete line of microprocessor-based equipment for train

detection, vital communication through the rails or line wire, and cab signaling. A single
microprocessor vitally controls the operation of each signal control module. Vital outputs and the
logic power supply are completely isolated from the signal battery. Safety Assurance LogicTM,
the GRS trademark for the design of fail-safe, single microprocessor-based products and systems,
insures the safety of the Genrakode System.

The Genrakode System consists of five modules which provide all functions for complete wayside
signaling and also cab signaling where required. These modules are designated as follows:
Control Point Module, Intermediate Module, Repeater Module, Switch Lock Module, and Cab
Signal Module.

Eight codes are provided and used for detecting trains, signal clearing, and block indication.
These codes can be sent on the tracks or line wires. The coding format consists of unipolar pulses
and utilizes pulse spacing and pulse width variation to signify different codes.

Direct filament and mechanism drive is provided for colorlight and searchlight signals at
intermediate locations. Filament checking and power-out detection are also provided.

Vital inputs are included to provide downgrade of signals as a result of switch circuit controller,
slide fence, or high water detector activation.

Diagnostics are programmed into the CPU software, enabling troubleshooting of a module by
observing LED indicators on the CPU board. These indicators provide quick identification of the
board or function which is not operating properly.

AAR posts are readily accessible, making installation quick and easy.

The Control Point Module can handle one or two independent track circuits. Control Point
Modules either interface with the interlocking relay logic at the location or can be wired directly
to a VPIR Vital Processor Interlocking unit.

The Intermediate Module, a single unit, controls two track circuits and the signals for both
directions at a location. No relays are required, and the stick logic for following moves is built in.

P2160A Vol. 1 1-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The Repeater Module is used at cut sections to repeat code information in both directions.

The Switch Lock Module provides all the functions necessary at a switch lock location and
includes "Line Circuit" signal control, series track circuit lock release, siding time release, switch
lock magnet control, and padlock contact detection.

The Cab Signal Module is used in conjunction with the track circuit modules to overlay 60 Hz,
100 Hz or 250 Hz cab signaling on the track circuit. The Cab Signal Module generates the 60
Hz, 100 Hz or 250 Hz carrier signal which is controlled directly at intermediate signals by the
Intermediate Module and is controlled at a control point by the Control Point Module and
interlocking relay logic or vital processor interlocking.

The Genrakode Test Unit can be used in conjunction with a module being put into service or
under test to duplicate the opposite end of a track circuit. This is done so that functional testing
of the entire transmission and reception of codes can be checked prior to the module’s connection
to the rails, and without requiring a person at the opposite end of the track circuit.

INTER-OPERABILITY

Genrakode is compatible with other manufacturers coded track systems and base pulse widths as
long as the pulse width falls within the decoding tolerance limits. The Genrakode system does not
accept or decode long or alternating long code 5 format.

Figure 1-1. Genrakode™ System

P2160A Vol. 1 1-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 2

SYSTEM CONCEPTS AND MICROPROCESSOR SAFETY DESIGN

SYSTEM CONCEPTS

Genrakode is a DC coded, bi-directional track circuit and vital communications system using the
rails for train detection, and block indication. The system eliminates the need for line wire circuits
in most cases which are both costly to install and costly to maintain by today’s railroads.

The bi-directional train detection and signal control circuits operate in a time sharing mode with
regard to usage of the rails within a track circuit. The basic system period operates on a 2.8
second cycle, with operation in one direction for 1.4 seconds and operation in the opposite
direction for the remaining 1.4 seconds.

Refer to Figures 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 for the discussion below.

The coding format is unipolar DC type pulses with pulse pairs used to signify vital signal clearing
codes. The time between leading edges of a pulse pair signifies the specific signal clearing code
being transmitted and received. Eight distinct codes are provided; five for vital signal clearing
codes, one for vital train detection, one for non-vital block indication, and one for non-vitally
initiating the tumble-down of signals in one direction.

The polarity of pulses transmitted on the rails from either end of a track circuit is the same.
Because the system is a unipolar pulse polarity system, insulated joint protection is provided by
reversing the polarity of rail connections to track circuits adjacent to the insulated joints.

CODE DEFINITIONS

Code 1: When transmitted by itself and decoded at the receive end of a track circuit, it indicates
that the track circuit is unoccupied. It is also decoded in the same manner when pulse pairs are
transmitted. Two consecutive receptions are required to decode Code 1. Code 1 drops out when
more than one of every three consecutive transmit cycle signals is not received and decoded.
Code 1 by itself is a 0.112 second pulse occurring once every 2.8 seconds.

Codes 8, 2, 3, 4, 7 are the five signal clearing codes: typically 8 is the most restrictive code and 7
is the least restrictive code. The most restrictive code has the longest time period between the
pulse pair, and the least restrictive code has the shortest time period between the pulse pair.
Timing is from leading edge of the first pulse to leading edge of the second pulse. Table 2-1
summarizes the clearing code characteristics.

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 2-1. Typical Clearing Code Characteristics.

PULSE PAIR
CODE TIMING APPLICATION
8 most 944 ms Varies: special control function, restrictive indication,
restrictive first approach signal
2 688 ms Approach aspect
3 496 ms Varies: approach medium, or advanced approach aspect
4 320 ms Varies: clear aspect, approach medium, approach limited
7 least 224 ms Varies: clear aspect, approach restrictive medium,
restrictive approach limited

Decoded signal clearing code dropout will occur when more than one out of every three
consecutive transmit cycle signals is not received and decoded.

Code 5: This non-vital code provides the ability to indicate track block occupancy starting at any
track circuit boundary location desired within a control point to control point block. The
information is decoded at the control point location. Code 5 information can be transmitted to
either or both control point locations with a track block boundary defined in both directions.
Code 5 is added to Code 1 or to a signal clearing code by lengthening the first or second
transmitted pulse from 0.112 second to 0.224 second. It is therefore possible to send three codes
at one time along the track: Code 1, Code 5, and a signal clearing code.

Another Code 5 format called “Alternating Code 5” is provided for interoperability with other
manufacturer’s equipment and special applications. Alternating Code 5 is selected prior to the
development of an application. This format only lengthens pulses every other transmit cycle
(hence “alternating”). When this format is selected for a given module, the module will only
decode and transmit 0.224 second alternating Code 5 pulses.

Code 6: This non-vital code decreases the tumble-down time of signals in one traffic direction.
Traffic direction and the tumble-up of signals is initiated by sending a signal clearing code from a
control point module. This would set the traffic direction towards the control point module. To
tumble down the signals in that direction, the signal clearing code transmission from the control
point module is stopped and Code 6 is transmitted from the control point module. The Code 6
transmission will cause the Code 1 pulse to lengthen to 0.6 seconds and stop transmission of the
signal clearing code. The Code 6 pulse is transmitted for one system cycle and is immediately
decoded at the opposite track circuit end. Decoding of Code 6 at this location immediately puts
the signal to stop and initiates a repeating of Code 6 to the next track circuit during the next
system cycle.

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Code 6 is considered non-vital because it does not have to be received to cause a signal tumble-
down. It only speeds up the tumble-down process. The fact that the signal clearing code
transmission at the control point is stopped initiates a fail-safe tumble-down of signals. In this
case, signal drop out time is 4.2 to 5.6 seconds. No code or the transmission of code 1 from the
control point will cause tumble-down of signals. Typically, code 6 transmission in both directions
is initiated if a train enters a track circuit from a siding. Code 6 is automatically cascaded through
intermediate, cut section repeater, and switch lock locations.

112 msec

CODE 1

2.8 sec

112 msec

CODE 7

224 msec

CODE 4

320 msec

CODE 3

496 msec

CODE 2

688 msec

CODE 8

944 msec

CODE 6 CODE 1

600 msec

Figure 2-1. Genrakode Timing (without Code 5)

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 224 msec
CODE 1
AND
CODE 5

2.8 sec

112 msec

CODE 7
AND
CODE 5

224 msec

CODE 4
AND
CODE 5

320 msec

CODE 3
AND
CODE 5

496 msec

CODE 2
AND
CODE 5

688 msec

CODE 8
AND
CODE 5

944 msec

CODE 1
AND
CODE 6 CODE 5

600 msec

Figure 2-2. Genrakode Timing (with Code 5)

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 224 msec 112 msec

CODE 1
AND
ALT CODE 5

8.4 sec

112 msec
CODE 7
AND
ALT CODE 5

224 msec

CODE 4
AND
ALT CODE 5

320 msec

CODE 3
AND
ALT CODE 5

496 msec

CODE 2
AND
ALT CODE 5

688 msec

CODE 8
AND
ALT CODE 5

944 msec

CODE 1
CODE 6 AND
ALT CODE 5

600 msec

Figure 2-3. Genrakode Timing (with Alternating Code 5)

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Train detection is provided by the traditional wheel axle shunting method with shunting
sensitivities designed for 0.06 ohm shunting. Receiver sensitivity is set at 0.5 ampere which is
consistent with many prior relay coded track circuits. Since the track circuit is a DC pulse format,
the "pick" point and "drop away" point of track circuit operation is essentially the "pick" point
current level of the receiver, and hysteresis or receiver "drop away" plays no important part in
track circuit operation. This is also consistent with relay coded track circuits.

Because the frequency content of the coding format is a very low frequency, and the track circuit
is not a DC relay track circuit, very long track circuits can be used. This minimizes the number of
insulated joints and cut section repeater locations needed. Many factors influence the maximum
obtainable track circuit length. These include track circuit lead length and wire size, rail size,
welded or railhead bonding, and the minimum ballast resistance conditions. See the specifications
in Appendix A, " Maximum Track Circuit Length " for maximum track circuit lengths.

Track circuits have to share the rails with other types of equipment such as overlay circuits,
motion detectors and predictors and are also subjected to induced levels of 60 Hz interference and
lightning surges. These factors have been considered in the design of the Genrakode system to
minimize their influence and thereby produce a reliable and compatible system. Track filters are
provided within the modules to accommodate the majority of situations encountered, as indicated
in Appendix A.

Genrakode modules operate from a nominal 12 V DC signal battery source. The Genrakode
converts this 12-V power source to a lower voltage that is completely isolated from the signal
battery, to operate the track circuit. This voltage can be selected from 1.5 Volts to 4 Volts. This
feature allows operation of the track circuit without the necessity of a separate track circuit
battery.

Signal lighting and light out detection is provided internally to Genrakode modules at intermediate
locations. No relays are required at such a location, and a regulated lamp voltage drive is
provided to maximize signal lamp life.

At control point locations, where the interlocking logic is performed by vital relays, Genrakode
modules are provided with decoded outputs for driving relays and code select circuits which
operate with relay contact closures, or a DC input voltage.

If the interlocking logic is performed by a VPI (Vital Processor Interlocking) system, relays are
not required for the interface between VPI and Genrakode. The interface of VPI to Genrakode
is performed by a direct connection. Decoded outputs from the Genrakode are connected to vital
input circuits of VPI and doublebreak outputs of VPI are connected to vital DC code select inputs
of Genrakode.

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The Genrakode system also incorporates the facility for cab signaling, if desired. The traditional
100 Hz code rated, or two aspect ON-OFF control system is implemented by overlaying the cab
signal system on the Genrakode track circuit. To transmit the cab signal aspect onto the rails, the
Genrakode modules, by way of the track codes being decoded or selected, produce a code rate
signal which controls a separate module containing the 100 Hz generator and power amplifier.
Maximum track circuit length is necessarily shortened in a cab signal system due to increased
signal attenuation along the rails at the 100 Hz carrier frequency. Filtering is provided in the Cab
Signal Module to isolate signals to and from the Genrakode unit, the Cab Signal Module and
other track circuit equipment. Sixty and 250 hertz cab signal equipment can also be provided if
required.

See Appendix B which contains typical application circuits and a typical control line diagram for
applying Genrakode to the rails.

MICROPROCESSOR SAFETY DESIGN

Genrakode operates in a fail-safe manner using a single microprocessor (microcontroller)

approach and incorporates GRS developed SALTM (Safety Assurance Logic).

Safety Assurance Logic is the name of a concept used to assure the safety of a vital product that
is implemented using a digital processor, or microprocessor. This concept has existed for more
than 15 years at GRS.

In essence, Safety Assurance Logic is the application of historically accepted safety techniques to
microprocessors. Diversity and cycle checking form the basis for safety, combined with the use of
"checkwords" as a method for indicating correct operation. Critical processes which must be
performed and checked or proven to have been performed are arranged so that their execution
creates checkwords. A complete set of current or updated checkwords is required each system
cycle to allow permissive outputs from the system. Faulty execution of safety critical tasks results
in an incorrect or incomplete checkword set which then inhibits permissive outputs in a fail-safe
manner.

The Genrakode main processor uses these checkwords to create a dynamic output at 10 kHz.
This 10 kHz signal is only present when the system is operating properly and all the checkwords
are current and correct.

A hardware circuit on the Vital Power Controller (VPC) Board vitally detects this 10 kHz signal
and produces a DC output voltage which is the power source for vital decoded output circuits.
The VPC is the "watchdog" for system operation and provides the method for vitally removing
power from solid state output circuits in the event of system failure.

Failure modes and other factors are taken into account in the design of Genrakode (and in most
microprocessor systems); they can all be generally classified to fall within the following list:

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 1. Failures in the vital input hardware circuits

2. CPU reading of the vital input circuits.

3. Requirement and determination that input data is current.

4. Proper input data memory operation.

5. CPU determination and calculation of intermediate process results.

6. Requirement and determination that intermediate results are current.

7. Proper intermediate results data memory operation.

8. CPU determination and calculation of output results as a function of input states and
intermediate results.

9. Requirement and determination that output results are current.

10. Proper output results data memory operation.

11. Control and verification of output circuits.

12. Failure in vital output hardware circuits.

13. Failure in system timing.

Safety Assurance Logic has evolved and matured at GRS to the extent that there is a large
number of acceptable techniques which can be employed by the designer to implement a software-
hardware design for the production of a system whose design has accounted for all of the failures
listed above. It is beyond the scope of this manual to describe the complete safety design involved
in Genrakode.

It should be noted that diversity includes time and space diversity as well as data format diversity.
For example, reading the same data input twice at different locations in the program (using
instructions that are not related through any common modes) and at different times provides some
degree of diversity even though the data may be represented in the same format. Protection is
provided against a transient condition or against a program memory change causing the wrong
input location to be read (only if the memory reads are done at two physically separate locations
and not as part of the same subroutine). This will not protect against addressing errors causing
both memory read instructions to incorrectly read the wrong location.

Complimenting and adding to the microprocessor safety design in Genrakode is the rigorous
safety analysis performed on the hardware and software design of the system.

P2160A, Vol. 1 2-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 3

CONTROL POINT MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION

The Control Point Module is used at end-of-block signal locations to initiate code transmission to
other signal locations through the rails, to decode signals from the rails, to energize vital outputs
to reflect the decoded codes and to optionally generate cab signal rates.

The Control Point Module is available in three basic configurations. Two of the configurations
(EAST and WEST) interface with a single track circuit, decoding and transmitting signals from
one direction only. Both configurations operate similarly but differ in three areas: 1) terminals
used to connect the module to external circuits, 2) location of the PC boards in the module, 3) the
"free running" cycle time. All EAST direction transmissions occur every 2.8 seconds when no
code is received. All WEST direction transmissions occur every 2.9 seconds when no code is
received. The difference is required so that both ends of a track circuit can synchronize when the
modules are powered up or when a train vacates the track circuit.

The third configuration is a combination of both the EAST and the WEST configurations. This
module contains all the hardware necessary to interface with two track circuits. The operation of
EAST and the WEST functions of this configuration are totally independent. One CPU board
runs both the EAST and the WEST programs simultaneously.

Selecting a code to be transmitted can be accomplished in two ways, depending upon the type of
code select board installed. Using the relay code select board (59473-830 GR 1), a connection is
made between a common select terminal, called a REFERENCE terminal, to one, two or three
code select terminals through a relay contact or a network of relay contacts. This code select
board will be used in the majority of applications.

Using the DC code select input board (59473-895 GR 1), a DC voltage is applied between the
code select REFERENCE terminal and one, two, or three code select input terminals. This code
select board is used when another electronic device, such as GRS’ Vital Processor Interlocking
(VPI) system, will be selecting the codes to be transmitted.

Both code select boards contain the required circuitry to select the codes to be transmitted to the
EAST and the WEST directions. If a single direction module is used, the unused code select
terminals must not be connected to any external circuitry.

When any code is to be transmitted, CODE 1 must also be selected along with the desired code.
If CODE 1 is not selected or if more than one vital code is selected at the same time, such as
selecting CODE 2 and CODE 3, code transmission is inhibited.

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Codes received from the rails are decoded and a relay output(s) is energized to reflect the
received code(s). There are eight relay outputs (per direction) corresponding to the eight codes
that can be received. Software options allow the HR/CODE 6 output terminal to be energized
under a variety of conditions. When used as a HR output, the output will be energized when
either CODE 7, 4, 3 or 2 is received, or as another option, any other customer specified set of
codes. When the output is used as a CODE 6 output, it will be energized when CODE 6 is
received.

With the addition of an Auxiliary I/O Board a number of functions can be added to the Control
Point Module. An EAST and/or WEST auxiliary input is provided that allows the transmitted
code to be downgraded. This input(s) is typically used for equipment such as switch controllers,
slide fences, high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc.; especially where the
signaling system must be informed of various external conditions. This input can also be used for
other functions where special signaling conditions arise.

Cab signal outputs are provided for the EAST and/or the WEST direction. These outputs,
located on the Auxiliary I/O Board, interface with the Genrakode Cab Signal Module and provide
the coded cab signal rates.

AAR terminal layout and circuit board assignments are shown in the module’s layout and
associated parts listing in P2160 Volume 2.

INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD

The following page provides a correlation between the board LEDs and the functions of each.

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 CONTROL POINT MODULE
CPU BOARD LED DEFINITION

WEST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the WEST track when lit
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the WEST track when lit
" " 5 " Codes selected but not transmitted when flashing
" " 7 " When all lit, more than 1 signal clearing code selected
" " 8 "

WEST Status : ALO N/A (off)

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP WEST Aux input energize when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK WEST track occupied when lit

RST = CPU Reset (when on) or Diagnostic mode (when flashing)

POR N/A (off) (N/A (on) with Aux I/O board installed)

EAST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the EAST track when lit
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the EAST track when lit
" " 5 " Codes selected but not transmitted when flashing
" " 7 " When all lit, more than 1 signal clearing code selected
" " 8 "

EAST Status : ALO N/A (off)

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP EAST Aux input energized when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK EAST track occupied when lit

Note: When the CPU is reset, all LEDs will be on, then "count down" until only the
RST LED is lit.
N/A = Not Applicable

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

TERMINAL DEFINITIONS

The Genrakode Control Point Module has 48 AAR terminals arranged in three rows of 16. See
Figure 3-1. The rows are referred to by TB1, TB2, or TB3 with row TB1 being the bottom most
row. A list of all the terminals by function and terminal location in parentheses follows.

B (TB1-1) B12 input connection for the positive battery terminal.

N (TB1-16) N12 input connection for the negative battery terminal.

WEST TK+ (TB1-2) Connection to the positive rail of the WEST track.

WEST TK- (TB1-3) Connection to the negative rail of the WEST track.

W RLY+ (TB1-4)
West Vital Power Controller (VPC) positive voltage terminal (isolated from the battery ) used
as the common connection for all WEST decoded output relays.

W C1RLY (TB3-1)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 1 is decoded from the west.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

W C2RLY (TB3-2)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 2 is decoded from the WEST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

W C3RLY (TB3-3)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 3 is decoded from the WEST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

W C4RLY (TB3-4)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 4 is decoded from the WEST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

W C5RLY (TB2-1)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 5 is decoded from the WEST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 W HR / W C6RLY (TB2-2)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when an HR code is decoded from the
WEST. As an option, this output can operate a relay when CODE 6 is decoded from the
WEST (instead of an HR code). Default codes for an HR output are CODE 7, 4, 3, 2 and 8.
Optionally, the HR output can be energized when any customer specified code is decoded. The
negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

W C7RLY (TB2-3)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 7 is decoded from the WEST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

W C8RLY (TB2-4)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 8 is decoded from the WEST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to W RLY+ (TB1-4).

W REF (TB3-5)
Common terminal for all WEST code selections. When using the contact closure type Code
Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal to one, two or three code select
terminals through a relay contact or a network of relay contacts to select the appropriate
code(s) to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the DC input code select board (59473-
890 GR 1) connect this terminal to the negative voltage terminal of the code select network.

W CNT1 (TB3-6)
Terminal for selecting CODE 1 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 1. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 1.

W CNT2 (TB2-5)
Terminal for selecting CODE 2 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 2. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 2.

W CNT3 (TB2-6)
Terminal for selecting CODE 3 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 3. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 3.

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 W CNT4 (TB2-7)
Terminal for selecting CODE 4 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 4. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 4.
W CNT5 (TB1-5)
Terminal for selecting CODE 5 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 5. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 5.
W CNT6 (TB1-6)
Terminal for selecting CODE 6 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 6. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 6.
W CNT7 (TB1-7)
Terminal for selecting CODE 7 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 7. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 7.
W CNT8 (TB1-8)
Terminal for selecting CODE 8 to be transmitted to the WEST. When using the contact
closure Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to W REF (TB3-5) to select CODE 8. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 8.
E TK+ (TB1-14)
Connection to the positive rail of the EAST track.
E TK- (TB1-15)
Connection to the negative rail of the EAST track.
E REF (TB3-11)
Common terminal for all EAST code selections. When using the contact closure type Code
Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal to one, two or three code select
terminals through a relay contact or a network of relay contacts to select the appropriate
code(s) to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the DC input Code Select Board (59473-
890-01) connect this terminal to the negative voltage terminal of the code select network.

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 E CNT1 (TB3-12)
Terminal for selecting CODE 1 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 1. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 1.
E CNT2 (TB2-10)
Terminal for selecting CODE 2 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 2. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 2.
E CNT3 (TB2-11)
Terminal for selecting CODE 3 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 3. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 3.
E CNT4 (TB2-12)
Terminal for selecting CODE 4 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 4. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 4.
E CNT5 (TB1-9)
Terminal for selecting CODE 5 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 5. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 5.
E CNT6 (TB1-10)
Terminal for selecting CODE 6 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830 GR 1), connect this terminal through a relay contact or
network of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 6. When using the DC input
Code Select Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select
network to select CODE 6.
E CNT7 (TB1-11)
Terminal for selecting CODE 7 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830-01), connect this terminal through a relay contact or network
of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 7. When using the DC input Code Select
Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select network to
select CODE 7.

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 E CNT8 (TB1-12)
Terminal for selecting CODE 8 to be transmitted to the EAST. When using the contact closure
Code Select Board (59473-830-01), connect this terminal through a relay contact or network
of relay contacts to E REF (TB3-11) to select CODE 8. When using the DC input Code Select
Board, connect this terminal to the positive voltage terminal of the code select network to
select CODE 8.

E RLY+ (TB1-13)
EAST Vital Power Controller (VPC) positive voltage terminal (isolated from the battery ) used
as the common connection for all EAST decoded output relays.

E C1RLY (TB3-13)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 1 is decoded from the EAST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ (TB1-13).

E C2RLY (TB3-14)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 2 is decoded from the EAST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ (TB1-13.

E C3RLY (TB3-15)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 3 is decoded from the EAST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ (TB1-13).

E C4RLY (TB3-16)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 4 is decoded from the EAST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ (TB1-13).

E C5RLY (TB2-13)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 5 is decoded from the EAST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ TB1-13).

E HR / E C6RLY (TB2-14)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when an HR code is decoded from the
EAST. As an option, this output can operate a relay when CODE 6 is decoded from the EAST
(instead of an HR code). Default codes for an HR output are CODE 7, 4, 3, 2 and 8.
Optionally, the HR output can be energized when any customer specified code is decoded. The
negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ (TB1-13).

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 E C7RLY (TB2-15)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 7 is decoded from the EAST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ (TB1-13).

E C8RLY (TB2-16)
Current sink output (active low) to operate a relay when CODE 8 is decoded from the EAST.
The negative side of the relay coil is connected to this terminal. The positive side of the relay is
connected to E RLY+ (TB1-13).

W AUX+ (TB3-7)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to W AUX- (TB3-8).
Refer to Section 3, Control Point Module – Software Program Options for operation.

W AUX- (TB3-8)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 3 Control Point
Module – Software Program Options for operation.

E AUX+ (TB3-9)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to E AUX- (TB3-10).
Refer to Section 3, Control Point Module – Software Program Options for operation.

E AUX- (TB3-10)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 3, Control Point
Module – Software Program Options for operation.

W CAB (TB2-8)
Current sink (active low) output used to interface the Control Point Module to the optional
CAB SIGNAL module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the
WEST track circuit. This output is referenced to WEST vital power controller (VPC) voltage,
W RLY+ (TB1-4).

E CAB (TB2-9)
Current sink (active low) output used to interface the Control Point Module with the optional
Cab Signal module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the EAST
track circuit. This output is referenced to EAST vital power controller (VPC) voltage, E
RLY+ (TB1-13).

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

P2160A, Vol. 1
TB3
W W W W W W W W E E E E E E
E AUX- E C3RLY
C1RLY C2RLY C3RLY C4RLY REF CNT1 AUX+ AUX- AUX+ REF CNT1 C1RLY C2RLY C4RLY

TB2

3-10
W W W W W E E E E
W C5RLY WHR W CAB E CAB E CNT2 EHR E C7RLY
C7RLY C8RLY CNT2 CNT3 CNT4 CNT3 CNT4 C5RLY C8RLY
(W C6 RLY) (E C6RLY)

TB1
W W W E E E
B WEST WEST W RLY+ W CNT7 E CNT5 E RLY+ EAST EAST N
CNT5 CNT6 CNT8 CNT6 CNT7 CNT8
TK+ TK- (SER.1) TK+ TK-
(SER.2)

Figure 3-1. Control Point Module AAR Terminals

ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

The Genrakode Control Point Module is available in many hardware configurations. The three
basic units are the EAST direction, the WEST direction and the dual EAST/WEST direction
modules. These configurations are available with either relay code select inputs or DC code select
inputs, AUX I/O I, II, or III and CONV/RCVR GR 1 or 2. The addition of an Auxiliary I/O
Board provides EAST and WEST two wire auxiliary inputs and EAST and WEST cab signal
outputs. Auxiliary inputs are used to down grade the signaling system due to an external
condition. The cab signal outputs interface with the Cab Signal Module and generate the
appropriate cab signal rates. A line driver/reciever board (CONV/RCVR GR 2) is required if
connecting to line wires.

The basic part number for the Control Point Module is 27359-15 GRXX with the desired
configuration called out by the group number. Table 3-1 lists the components available for
Control Point Modules. Call GRS Sales Rep. for specific group numbers.

Table 3-1. Control Point Module Components.

NAME GRS PART #

CONV/RCVR 59473-833-01 and –02

DECODE OUT 59473-838-01

VPC 59473-835-01

RLY CODE SEL 59473-830-01

DC CODE SEL 59473-895-01

REG/FILTER 59473-834-01

CPU 59473-831-01

AUX I/O I 59473-837-01

AUX I/O II 59473-958-01

AUX I/O III 31166-043-01

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS

The use of microprocessor technology allows any one particular Genrakode module to perform in
many different ways, depending on the software that is installed. Different operating
characteristics can be selected by simply installing a different EPROM(s). A list of the four
standard options that are available for the Control Point Module follows. Use this list in
conjunction with the Software Program Worksheet at the end of this section to select the options
that are required. An * next to an item indicates that this is the standard option type.

Option 1: Direction

This option determines the direction(s) the Control Point Module is set up for. If item 1 is
selected, the module will be a single direction type set up for the EAST direction only. If item 2
is selected, the module will be a single direction type set up for the WEST direction only. If item
3 is selected, the module will be a dual direction type set up to operate in both the EAST and
WEST directions. This is a module that combines the functions of both an EAST and a WEST
Control Point Module into one package.

1. EAST ONLY
2. WEST ONLY
3. EAST and WEST

Option 2: Output Type

This option determines when the CODE 6/HR output will be energized. If item 1 is selected, the
CODE 6/HR output will be energized when either code 7,4,3,2, or 8 output is energized. This is
the HR function. Item 2 is the same as item 1, except that the HR output will be energized by a
different set of codes specified by the customer. If item 3 is selected, the CODE 6/HR output will
be energized when code 6 is received. This is the CODE 6 function.

* 1. HR energized by code 7,4,3,2, or 8.

2. HR energized by user specified codes
3. CODE 6

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 3: Auxiliary Inputs

This option determines if the auxiliary inputs will be used. If item 1 is selected, the auxiliary inputs
are not required. If item 2 is selected, the auxiliary inputs will be read and an Auxiliary I/O Board
is required.
* 1. NO AUX INPUTS
2. AUX INPUTS - operation as follows:
if AUX input is de-energized
- decoded relays de-energized, except Code 1
- transmitted code downgraded to CODE 1

Option 4: Cab Signal

This option determines if the cab signal outputs will be used. If item 1 is selected, the cab signal
output(s) are not required. If item 2 is selected, the cab signal output(s) will be controlled and an
Auxiliary I/O Board is required. If the cab signal output(s) are required, the cab signal rates must
also be selected.

* 1. NO CAB SIGNAL
2. CAB SIGNAL

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-13 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS

Control Point Module:

CUSTOMER:

LOCATION :

DATE:

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION:

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION:

WIRE WRAP ID CODE

(assigned by GRS):

PROGRAMMED EPROM KIT

(assigned by GRS):

PROGRAMMED EPROM(s)
(assigned by GRS):

Use this worksheet in conjunction with Software Program Options

to select the options required for a Control Point Module.

Option 1: Direction (select 1,2, or 3)

1: EAST only
2: WEST only
3: EAST/WEST

Option 2: Output Type (select 1,2,or 3)

if option 2 is selected, specify codes:
1: HR=7,4,3,2,8
2: HR= _______ (specify)
3: Code 6

Option 3: Auxiliary Inputs (select 1 or 2)

1: No Aux inputs
2: Aux inputs

Option 4: Cab Signal (select 1 or 2)

1: No cab signal
2: Cab signal
if option 2 is selected, specify rates below:
(select 50,75,120,180,270,420)

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-14 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 EAST WEST
CODE OUT CAB RATE CAB RATE
1 ______ ______
7 ______ ______
4 ______ ______
3 ______ ______
2 ______ ______
8 ______ ______
NO CODE ______ ______

ORDERING INFORMATION – CONTROL POINT MODULE

To order a Control Point Module, first select the desired Hardware components by reviewing the
options that are available as listed above. Then fill in the Software Program Worksheet with the
selected software program options from above. Consult a GRS Sales Rep. for specific part
numbers and ordering details.

Note: An Auxiliary I/O Board is required if the auxiliary inputs/outputs, cab signal
outputs or approach lighting is used. If it has been determined that an Auxiliary
I/O Board is required, select the required hardware configuration based upon the
direction the module must operate in and the type of code select inputs required.
Relay type code select inputs are the standard type and only require a contact or
group of contact closures to select a code. DC type code select inputs require the
presence of a DC voltage to select a code. DC code select inputs are required
when the code selection is generated by another electronic device, such as VPI. If
the auxiliary inputs are not required in the application and an Auxiliary I/O Board
is installed, they must be connected to 12-V DC battery energy.

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-15 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

P2160A, Vol. 1 3-16 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 4
INTERMEDIATE MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION (INCLUDING AUX, POWER DETECT)

The Intermediate Module is used at intermediate signal locations to decode signals from the rails,
drive various types of signals, transmit signals to other modules through the rails and to optionally
generate cab signal rates. No relays are necessary at an intermediate location because Genrakode
can drive lamps and mechanisms directly and perform all required light out detection. One
intermediate module receives, transmits, and drives signals for both the EAST and WEST
directions.
The Intermediate Module can drive three types of signals: searchlight, color light, and position
light. Codes received from the rails are decoded into signal aspects. These aspects are qualified
with other data such as open filaments, stuck mechanisms, auxiliary inputs, etc. to determine the
actual aspect that will be displayed. These same factors also determine the code that will be
transmitted to the next location.
Signal lamp filaments are continuously tested to be intact. Typically if a filament is determined to
be open, the displayed aspect and the code transmitted to the next location can be down graded.
For color and position light signals, only lamps that are required to be on and that have open
filaments will cause the system to be down graded. Open filaments in lamps required to be off
have no effect on the signaling system.
For searchlight operation, the position of the mechanism is continuously checked. Typically if a
mechanism is determined to be out of correspondence, the signal is set dark and the signaling
system is downgraded.
Options are provided to allow the signals to be approach lit or approach lit only when ac power is
lost. When signals are approach lit, they are normally off until the track circuit is shunted.
With the addition of Auxiliary I/O Boards I or II or III, a number of functions can be added to the
Intermediate Module. EAST and WEST auxiliary inputs are provided that allows the displayed
aspect and the transmitted code to be downgraded. These inputs are typically used for equipment
such as switch controllers, slide fence detectors, high-water detectors, dragging equipment
detectors, etc. where the signaling system must be informed of various external conditions. These
inputs can also be used for other functions where special signaling conditions arise, such as double
track approach lighting.
A dedicated input, called the power detect input on the Auxiliary I/O (Boards I and II), is
provided to detect the presence/absence of 110-V ac power. This input can be used to approach-
light the signal when ac power is lost; this reduces the drain on the batteries. If approach lighting
is not required, the input is tied to 12-V DC battery energy to continuously light the signals.
Outputs for cab signal are provided for both the EAST and WEST directions. These outputs,
located on the Auxiliary I/O Board, interface to the Genrakode cab signaling module and provide
the coded cab signal rates.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

DIRECTIONAL STICK LOGIC
Genrakode incorporates logic to determine the direction of train movement. Although there is no
physical output, such as a stick relay, there is the equivalent of such in software. When a train is
approaching a signal location, the axles shunt all code transmission to locations behind the train.
This keeps all signals behind the train at RED until the train has cleared the block. The directional
stick logic resolves this problem by determining which direction the train is going and transmits a
signal clearing code behind the train to allow following trains to approach.
Genrakode incorporates stick logic for both EAST and WEST bound moves. The operation of
sticks are identical except for the direction of train movement. An EAST bound train will cause
the EAST stick to be picked and a WEST bound train will cause the WEST stick to be picked.
The following example will be used to illustrate the operation of the EAST stick.
Assume that an EAST bound train is approaching an intermediate location. This location is
receiving signal clearing codes from the EAST and code 1 from the WEST. As soon as the train
steps onto the WEST track, no codes will be received from the WEST. Genrakode checks that a
signal clearing code is being received from the EAST and the WEST stick is down. If both of
these conditions are satisfied and the WEST track is not receiving any code, an internal timer
called the approach timer is started (this timer is normally 10 seconds). If these conditions do not
change during the approach period, the EAST stick is enabled (but not "picked"). If the
conditions change before the approach timer has expired, the approach timer is reset to 0 and the
conditions must be satisfied for the duration of the approach timer before the stick is enabled.
If the conditions change after the EAST stick is enabled, a second internal timer, called the drop
out timer, is started (this timer is also normally 10 seconds). If the conditions return to the
required state before the drop out timer expires, the drop out timer is reset to 0 and won’t be
started again until the conditions do not meet the requirements. If the conditions do not return to
the required states before the drop out timer expires, the EAST stick is disabled and the entire
stick sequence must be started again.
When the EAST bound train crosses the insulated joint, no codes will be received from the EAST
track. If the EAST stick is enabled and the WEST stick is down, the EAST stick will be "picked"
causing the stick code (usually code 2) to be transmitted to the WEST (behind the train) allowing
for a following move. When the WEST track is cleared, the stick is "stuck" and the stick code
will continue to be transmitted to the WEST behind the train.
The EAST stick will drop when a signal clearing code or a code 6 is received from the EAST.
AAR terminal layout and circuit board assignments are shown in the module's layout and
associated parts listing in Section 1, of Volume 2.

INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD

On the following two pages there is an explanation of how to interpret the purpose of the LED in
either a colorlight or searchlight application.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SEARCHLIGHT INTERMEDIATE MODULE
CPU BOARD LED DEFINITION

WEST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Status : ALO WEST A filament OPEN when lit, A mechanism out of correspondence
when flashing
" " : BLO WEST B filament OPEN when lit, B mechanism out of correspondence
when flashing
" " : INP WEST Aux input energize when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK WEST stick picked when lit
" " : TRK WEST track occupied when lit

RST = CPU Reset (when on) or Diagnostic mode (when flashing)

POR Power detect input de-energized when lit (only with Aux I/O board
installed)

EAST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Status : ALO EAST A filament open when lit, A mechanism out of correspondence
when flashing
" " : BLO EAST B filament open when lit, B mechanism out of correspondence
when flashing
" " : INP EAST Aux input energized when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK EAST stick picked when lit
" " : TRK EAST track occupied when lit

Note: When the CPU is reset, all LEDs will be on, then "count down" until only the RST
LED is lit.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 COLORLIGHT INTERMEDIATE MODULE
CPU BOARD LED DEFINITION

WEST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Status : ALO OPEN filament in WEST A signal head detected when lit
" " : BLO OPEN filament in WEST B signal head detected when lit
" " : INP WEST Aux input energize when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK WEST stick picked when lit
" " : TRK WEST track occupied when lit

RST = CPU Reset (when on) or Diagnostic mode (when flashing)

POR Power detect input de-energized when lit (only when Aux I/O board installed)

EAST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Status : ALO OPEN filament in EAST A signal head detected when lit
" " : BLO OPEN filament in EAST B signal head detected when lit
" " : INP EAST Aux input energized when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK EAST stick picked when lit
" " : TRK EAST track occupied when lit

Note: When the CPU is reset, all LEDs will be on, then "count down" until only the RST
LED is lit.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

COLORLIGHT CONTROL

The Intermediate Module can drive from one to six lamps (per direction) via the Color Light
Drive Board. All outputs are continuously checked to be in the correct state and all lamp are
check to insure that the filaments are intact.

Lamps are checked once every 2.8 seconds to insure that the filament is intact. If a filament is
determined to be open, both the displayed aspect and the transmitted code typically will be
downgraded according to the programming shown in the code and aspect chart.

The state of the lamps (on or off) are checked every 16 milliseconds to insure that the lamp drive
circuitry has not failed. If this hardware failure does occur, energy will be remove from all outputs
in a failsafe manner and no code will be transmitted to the next signal locations (EAST and
WEST).

SEARCHLIGHT CONTROL

The Intermediate Module can drive one or two searchlight mechanisms (per direction) via the
Searchlight Drive Board. Bipolar drive circuits provide the necessary drive to control the
mechanism(s) and lamp drive circuits control the lamp(s).

The position of the mechanism is checked via three inputs read back from the mechanism
contacts. If a four wire check circuit is used, all positions of the mechanism are proven. If a three
wire check circuit is used, it is possible for the mechanism to be stuck in the green position and
not be detected if the yellow position is called for. This condition may be acceptable if the
"green" position and the "yellow" position display the same aspect. See Figure 4-1.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 B12

WA-RG (RED)

WA-HG (YELLOW)

WA-DG (GREEN)

Four - Wire Check Circuit.

B12

WB-RG (RED)

(YELLOW
WA-HG

GREEN)
OR
WA-DG

Three - Wire Check Circuit.

Figure 4-1. Three - and Four - Wire Searchlight Check Circuits.

The position of the mechanism(s) is checked every 16 milliseconds to prove that the correct
aspect is being displayed. If the mechanism has been called to a new position, the new position is
checked for correspondence after a delay of two seconds, and every 16 milliseconds thereafter. If
either mechanism is out of correspondence, the lamp is turned off and the mechanism (both
mechanisms if 2 are driven) are released. The code that is transmitted to the next location will
typically be downgraded to CODE 1. This provides an automatic stuck-mechanism check and
downgrades the local and approaching signals. CODE 6 can optionally be transmitted to speed
tumbledown.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The lamp(s) filament is checked once every 2.8 seconds to insure that the filament is intact. If the
filament is determined to be open, typically both the displayed aspect and the transmitted code
will be down graded according to the programming shown in the code and aspect chart.
Obviously, if only one signal head is used, the displayed aspect typically will be dark. However, if
two signals are being driven, the signal with the filament intact can be down graded. If both
lamps are open, the transmitted code typically will be down graded to CODE 1.

The state of the lamp(s) (on or off) is checked every 16 milliseconds to insure that the lamp drive
circuitry has not failed. If this hardware failure does occur, energy is removed from all signal
output drive circuits in a fail-safe manner.

TERMINAL DEFINITIONS

The Intermediate Module has 48 AAR terminals arranged in three rows of 16. See Figure 4-2.
The rows are referred to by TB1, TB2, or TB3 with row TB1 being the bottom most row. Since
the Intermediate Module is used for driving both searchlight and colorlight signals, 12 of the
terminals have two sets of nomenclature. A list of all the terminals by function and the terminal
location in parentheses follows.

B (TB1-1) B12 input connection for the positive battery terminal.

N (TB1-16) N12 input connection for the negative battery terminal.

W TK+ (TB1-2) Connection to the positive rail of the WEST track.

W TK- (TB1- Connection to the negative rail of the WEST track.

3)

WEST LAMP + (TB1-7)

West Vital Power Controller (VPC) positive voltage terminal (isolated from the battery ) used
as the common connection for all WEST lamps (searchlight or color/position light).

WA SEARCHLIGHT + COIL / WEST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 1W (TB2-4)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the positive coil connection for the WEST A signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the WEST
signal. Typically, this is the GREEN lamp in the A signal head for the WEST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to WEST
LAMP + (TB1-7)

P2160A Vol. 1 4-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 WA SEARCHLIGHT - COIL / WEST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 2W (TB2-5)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the negative coil connection for the WEST A signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the WEST
signal. Typically, this is the YELLOW lamp in the A signal head for the WEST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to
WEST LAMP + (TB1-7).

WA SEARCHLIGHT LAMP / WEST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 3W (TB2-6)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for the WEST A signal lamp. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the WEST
signal. Typically, this is the RED lamp in the A signal head for the WEST direction. One side
of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to WEST
LAMP + (TB1-7).

WB SEARCHLIGHT + COIL / WEST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 4W (TB1-4)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the positive coil connection for the WEST B signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the WEST
signal. Typically, this is the GREEN lamp in the B signal head for the WEST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to WEST
LAMP + (TB1-7).

WB SEARCHLIGHT - COIL / WEST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 5W (TB1-5)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the negative coil connection for the WEST B signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the WEST
signal. Typically, this is the YELLOW lamp in the B signal head for the WEST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to
WEST LAMP + (TB1-7).

WB SEARCHLIGHT LAMP / WEST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 6W (TB1-6)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for the WEST B signal lamp. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the WEST
signal. Typically, this is the RED lamp in the B signal head for the WEST direction. One side
of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to WEST
LAMP + (TB1-7).

P2160A Vol. 1 4-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 WA SEARCHLIGHT WA RG (TB3-1)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the WEST A signal mechanism. If the mechanism is de-energized
(in the RED position), a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the GREEN or YELLOW position, a 0
V DC input is required. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is
required.
WA SEARCHLIGHT WA HG (TB3-2)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the WEST A signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the YELLOW position, a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
down grade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or GREEN position, a 0 V
DC input is required. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is
required.
WA SEARCHLIGHT WA DG (TB3-3)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the WEST A signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the GREEN position, a nominal +12 V DC voltage (referenced to the battery N) must be
present. If the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck
mechanism and downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or YELLOW
position, a 0 V DC input is required. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no
connection is required.
WB SEARCHLIGHT WB RG (TB2-1)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the WEST B signal mechanism. If the mechanism is de-energized
(in the RED position), a nominal +12 V DC voltage (referenced to the battery N) must be
present. If the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck
mechanism and down grade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the GREEN or
YELLOW position, a 0 V DC input is required. If the B signal head is not used, this terminal
must be connected to +12 Vdc energy. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no
connection is required.
WB SEARCHLIGHT WB HG (TB2-2)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the WEST B signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the YELLOW position, a nominal +12 V DC voltage (referenced to the battery N) must be
present. If the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck
mechanism and downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or GREEN
position, a 0 V DC input is required. If the B signal head is not used, this terminal requires no
connection. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is required.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 WB SEARCHLIGHT WB DG (TB2-3)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the WEST B signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the GREEN position, a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or YELLOW position, a 0 V
DC input is required. If the B signal head is not used, this terminal requires no connection. For
color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is required.

EAST TK+ (TB1-14)

Connection to the positive rail of the EAST track.

EAST TK- (TB1-15)

Connection to the negative rail of the EAST track.

EAST LAMP + (TB1-10)

EAST Vital Power Controller (VPC) positive voltage terminal (isolated from the battery ) used
as the common connection for all EAST lamps (searchlight or color/position light).

EA SEARCHLIGHT + COIL / EAST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 1E (TB2-11)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the positive coil connection for the EAST A signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the EAST
signal. Typically, this is the GREEN lamp in the A signal head for the EAST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to EAST
LAMP + (TB1-10).

EA SEARCHLIGHT - COIL / EAST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 2E (TB2-12)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the negative coil connection for the EAST A signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the EAST
signal. Typically, this is the YELLOW lamp in the A signal head for the EAST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to EAST
LAMP + (TB1-10).

EA SEARCHLIGHT LAMP / EAST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 3E (TB2-13)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for the EAST A signal lamp. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the EAST
signal. Typically, this is the RED lamp in the A signal head for the EAST direction. One side
of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to EAST
LAMP + (TB1-10).

P2160A Vol. 1 4-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 EB SEARCHLIGHT + COIL / EAST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 4E (TB1-11)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the positive coil connection for the EAST B signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the EAST
signal. Typically, this is the GREEN lamp in the B signal head for the EAST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to EAST
LAMP + (TB1-10).

EB SEARCHLIGHT - COIL / EAST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 5E (TB1-12)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is the negative coil connection for the EAST B signal mechanism. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the EAST
signal. Typically, this is the YELLOW lamp in the B signal head for the EAST direction. One
side of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to EAST
LAMP + (TB1-10).

EB SEARCHLIGHT LAMP / EAST COLORLIGHTS LAMP 6E (TB1-13)

The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for the EAST B signal lamp. For color light
operation, this terminal is a current sink output (active low) for one of six lamps for the EAST
signal. Typically, this is the RED lamp in the B signal head for the EAST direction. One side
of the lamp is connected to this terminal. The other side of the lamp is connected to EAST
LAMP + (TB1-10).

EA SEARCHLIGHT EA RG (TB3-14)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the EAST A signal mechanism. If the mechanism is de-energized
(in the RED position), a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the GREEN or YELLOW position, a 0
V DC input is required. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is
required.

EA SEARCHLIGHT EA HG (TB3-15)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the EAST A signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the YELLOW position, a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or GREEN position, a 0 V
DC input is required. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is
required.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 EA SEARCHLIGHT EA DG (TB3-16)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the EAST A signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the GREEN position, a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or YELLOW position, a 0 V
DC input is required. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is
required.

EB SEARCHLIGHT EB RG (TB2-14)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the EAST B signal mechanism. If the mechanism is de-energized
(in the RED position), a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the GREEN or YELLOW position, a 0
V DC input is required. If the B signal head is not used, this terminal must be connected to
+12 V DC energy. For color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is
required.

EB SEARCHLIGHT EB HG (TB2-15)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the EAST B signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the YELLOW position, a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or GREEN position, a 0 V
DC input is required. If the B signal head is not used, this terminal requires no connection. For
color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is required.

EB SEARCHLIGHT EB DG (TB2-16)
The function of this terminal depends on the type of signal driven. For searchlight operation,
this terminal is an input from the EAST B signal mechanism. If the mechanism is energized in
the GREEN position, a nominal +12 V DC (referenced to the battery N) must be present. If
the voltage is not present, Genrakode will interpret the missing input as a stuck mechanism and
downgrade the signaling system. If the mechanism is in the RED or YELLOW position, a 0 V
DC input is required. If the B signal head is not used, this terminal requires no connection. For
color light operation, this terminal is unused and no connection is required.

POWER DETECT + (TB2-8)

Input terminal for detection of ac power. As an option, the signals can be approach lit with loss
of ac power by detection circuitry located on the Auxiliary I/O Board. If this option is
required, connect this terminal to BX 110. If the Auxiliary I/O Board is not installed, no
connection to this terminal is required. If the Auxiliary I/O Board is installed but approach
lighting with loss of ac power is not required, connect this terminal to + 12 V DC (B) energy.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 POWER DETECT - (TB2-9)
Input terminal for detection of ac power. As an option, the signals can be approach lit with loss
of ac power by detection circuitry located on the Auxiliary I/O Board. If this option is
required, connect this terminal to NX 110. If the Auxiliary I/O Board is not installed, no
connection to this terminal is required. If the Auxiliary I/O Board is installed but approach
lighting with loss of ac power is not required, connect this terminal to 12 V DC (N) energy.

W EX I (TB3-4)
Local one-wire input referenced to WEST vital power controller (VPC) voltage, WEST LAMP
+ (TB1-7). This terminal is normally unused and is provided for special signaling applications
that may arise in the future. For normal application, no connection is required.

W EX O (TB3-5)
Current sink (active low) output referenced to WEST Vital Power
Controller (VPC) voltage, WEST LAMP + (TB1-7). This terminal is
used for double track approach lighting of the westbound signal. See Figure 4-3 for the
connections of the double track approach lighting.

W AUX+ (TB3-7)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to W AUX- (TB3-8).
Refer to Section 4, Intermediate Module – Software Program Options.

W AUX- (TB3-8)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 4, Intermediate
Module – Software Program Options.

W CAB (TB3-6)
Current sink (active low) output interfaces the INTERMEDIATE module with the optional
CAB SIGNAL module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the
WEST track circuit. This output is referenced to WEST Vital Power Controller (VPC)
voltage, WEST LAMP + (TB1-7).

E EX I (TB3-11)
Local one-wire input referenced to EAST Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, EAST LAMP
+ (TB1-10). This terminal is normally unused and is provided for special signaling applications
that may arise in the future. For normal application, no connection is required.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-13 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 E EX O (TB3-12)
Current sink (active low) output referenced to EAST Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage,
EAST LAMP + (TB1-10). This terminal is used for double track approach lighting of the
westbound signal. See Figure 4-3 for the connections of the double track approach lighting.

E AUX+ (TB3-9)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for down grading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to E AUX- (TB3-10).
Refer to Section 4, Intermediate Module – Software Program Options.

E AUX- (TB3-10)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 4, Intermediate
Module – Software Program Options.

E CAB (TB3-13)
Current sink (active low) output interfaces the INTERMEDIATE module with the optional
CAB SIGNAL module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the
EAST track circuit. This output is referenced to EAST Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage,
EAST LAMP + (TB1-10).
(TB1-8) Unused terminal. No connection required.

(TB1-9) Unused terminal. No connection required.

(TB2-7) Unused terminal. No connection required.

(TB2-10) Unused terminal. No connection required.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-14 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

P2160A Vol. 1
WA SEARCHLIGHT AUX I/O EA SEARCHLIGHT

TB3
WA RG WA HG WA DG W EXI W EXO W CAB W AUX+ W AUX- E AUX+ E AUX- E EXI E EXO E CAB EA RG EA HG EA DG

WB SEARCHLIGHT WA SEARCHLIGHT EA SEARCHLIGHT EB SEARCHLIGHT

+ COIL
LAMP + COIL - LAMP
-

TB2

4-15
LAMP LAMP LAMP POWER LAMP LAMP LAMP
WB RG WB HG WB DG EB RG EB HG EB DG
1W 2W 3W DETECT 1E 2E 3E
+ -

WB SEARCHLIGHT EB SEARCHLIGHT
+ COIL - LAMP + COIL - LAMP

TB1
LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP EAST LAMP LAMP LAMP
B WEST WEST EAST EAST N
4W 5W 6W WEST LAMP 4E 5E 6E
TK+ TK- TK+ TK-
+ +

Figure 4-2. Intermediate Module AAR Terminals.

ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 E EXO E EXO
TB3-12 TB3-12

EAST LAMP + EAST LAMP +

TB1-10 TB1-10

INTERMEDIATE INTERMEDIATE
1 2

W EXO W EXO
TB3-5 TB3-5

WEST LAMP + WEST LAMP +

TB1-7 TB1-7

For EAST Double Track Approach Lighting:

- Connect E EXO Terminals (TB3-12) From Module 1 to Module 2

- Connect EAST Lamp + Terminals (TB1-10) From Module 1 to Module 2

For WEST Double Track Approach Lighting:

- Connect W EXO Terminals (TB3-5) From Module 1 to Module 2

- Connect WEST Lamp + Terminals (TB1-7) From Module 1 to Module 2

Figure 4-3. Connections for Double Track Approach Lighting.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-16 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

The Intermediate Module is available in many hardware configurations. There are four basic units:
the colorlight configuration with and without an Auxiliary I/O board and the searchlight
configuration with and without an Auxiliary I/O board. An Auxiliary I/O Board is required if the
auxiliary inputs, the ac power detect input or the cab signal outputs are required. A line
driver/receiver board is required if connecting to line wires.

The basic part number for the Intermediate Module is 27359-16-XX with the desired
configuration called out by the group number. Table 4-1 lists all the components available for an
Intermediate Module.

Table 4-1. Intermediate Module Components

NAME GRS PART #

REGULATOR/FILTER 59473-834-01
CPU 59473-831-01
CONVERTER/RECEIVER 59473-833-01 and –02
HI POWER VPC 59473-872-01
SEARCH LIGHT DRIVER 59473-863-01
COLOR/POS LIGHT DR 59473-864-01
AUXILIARY I/O I 59473-837-01
AUXILIARY I/O II 59473-958-01
AUXILIARY I/O III 31166-043-01

SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS

The use of microprocessor technology allows any one particular Genrakode module to perform in
many different ways, depending on the software that is installed. Different operating
characteristics can be selected by simply installing a different EPROM's. The following lists the
12 standard options that are available for the Intermediate Module. Use this list in conjunction
with the Software Program Worksheet to select the required options. An * next to an option
indicates that this is the standard option type.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-17 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 1: Signal Type

This option determines the type of signals that will be driven.

1. SEARCH LIGHT
* 2. COLOR LIGHT
3. POSITION LIGHT

Option 2: Approach Lighting

This option determines if the signals are to be approach lit. Signals can be approach lit by an
approaching train (does not require Auxiliary Board) or approach lit only when ac power is lost
(requires Auxiliary I/O Board). If approach lighting is not required at present, but may be
required in the future, select item 3 and wire the power detect input to 12 V DC battery energy.
The advantage is that the signal will not be approach lit, but the option can easily be added at a
future date. The disadvantage is that an Auxiliary I/O Board is required.

* 1. no approach lighting
2. approach lighting
3. approach lighting only with loss of ac power

Option 3: Aspect Flash Rate

This option determines the rate at which the signal aspects will flash (if an aspect is specified as
flashing)

1. NONE
2. 50 flashes per minute
* 3. 60 flashes per minute
4. OTHER (customer specified)

Option 4: Searchlight Light Out

This option specifies the desired position of the searchlight mechanism(s) when the lamp filament
opens.

1. not applicable (other signal type being used)

2. mechanism remains energized when lamp is out
* 3. mechanism de-energized when lamp is out

P2160A Vol. 1 4-18 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 5: Stick Logic

This option determines the operation of the stick logic.

1. stick logic not required

2. picked stick holds opposing signal red
* 3. picked stick allows opposing signal to clear, opposing code output = CODE 1

Option 6: Stick Qualify Time

This option determines the amount of time a track circuit must be occupied before a stick will be
enabled. See description of stick logic operation.

1. 4 seconds
* 2. 10 seconds

Option 7: Auxiliary Inputs (E Aux, W Aux)

This option determines if the auxiliary inputs will be used. If item 1 is selected, the auxiliary inputs
are not required. If item 2 is selected, the auxiliary inputs will be read and an Auxiliary I/O Board
is required. If the auxiliary inputs are not required but an Auxiliary I/O Board is installed, both
EAST and WEST auxiliary inputs must be connected to 12 V DC energy.

* 1. NO AUX INPUTS
2. AUX INPUTS - operation as follows:

if WEST AUX input is de-energized:

WEST SIGNAL - STOP
EAST SIGNAL - no effect
WEST CODE OUT - code 1 and 6
EAST CODE OUT - code 1 and 6

if EAST AUX input is de-energized:

EAST SIGNAL - STOP
WEST SIGNAL - no effect
EAST CODE OUT - code 1 and 6
WEST CODE OUT - code 1 and 6

3. AUX INPUTS - customer defined

Note: If it is required that both EAST and WEST signals go to STOP when the AUX
input is de-energized, wire both the EAST and WEST AUX inputs in parallel.

Note: Code 6 is only transmitted once.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-19 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 8: Code 5 With Auxiliary Inputs

This option determines if the code 5 will be repeated with the absence of an auxiliary input. The
item provides a block indication of the auxiliary input status. If item 2 is selected, when either
auxiliary input is not energized, code 5 will not be repeated in either direction, providing an
indication that the block is not clear.

*1. code 5 repeated in both directions when auxiliary input de-energized.

2. code 5 not repeated in both directions when auxiliary input de-energized.

Option 9: Cab Signal

This option determines if the cab signal outputs will be used. If item 1 is selected, the cab signal
outputs are not required. If item 2 is selected, the cab signal outputs will be controlled and an
Auxiliary I/O Board is required. If the cab signal outputs are required, the cab signal rates must
be indicated on the program worksheet.

* 1. NO CAB SIGNAL
2. CAB SIGNAL

Option 10: Cab Signal Turn On

This option determines when the cab signal generators will be turned on (if used).

* 1. cab signal not used

2. cab signal generator turned on with CODE 6 (tumble down) or NO CODE received.
3. cab signal generator turned on with selected vital code

Option 11: Synchronization

This option determines the transmission timing of the module.

* 1. Asynchronous operation - The transmitted codes on each side of the module are not
synchronized to each other. CODE 6 tumble down time averages 1.4 seconds per
location. Tumble up time averages 5.6 seconds per location.

2. Synchronous operation - A received code on one side of the module causes a code to be
transmitted on the opposite side of the module. Maximum of 5 locations between control
points. CODE 6 tumble down time is 4.2 seconds max.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-20 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 12: Cross Check

This option determines the cross checking functions between EAST and WEST signal aspects and
EAST and WEST transmitted codes.

* 1. no cross check - Normal coding in both directions. Decoded codes cause aspects to be
displayed.

2. signal cross check - With signal clearing codes decoded from both directions, both EAST
and WEST aspects will be red with normal coding. When a signal clearing code is
received from one direction only, the opposing signal is checked to be red, and if it is, the
local signal is allowed to clear.

3. full cross check - The local signal will only be allowed to clear when a signal clearing
code is received if the opposing signal is at red. Signal clearing codes will only be
allowed in one direction, with CODE 1 in the direction of the stopped signal.

SPECIAL OPTIONS

The following lists some of the special options that are available upon request for the Intermediate
Module. The Intermediate Module can be easily applied to any non-standard signaling situation
to resolve uncommon signaling problems. Consult a GRS Sales Rep. for further details.

- DOUBLE TRACK APPROACH LIGHTING

- SPECIAL SIGNAL DRIVING APPLICATIONS
- SPECIAL AUXILIARY INPUT REQUIREMENTS
- SPECIAL HIGHWAY CROSSING OPERATION
- NON-STANDARD STICK OPERATION

P2160A Vol. 1 4-21 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS

Intermediate :

CUSTOMER:

LOCATION:

DATE:

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION:

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION:

WIRE WRAP ID CODE

(assigned by GRS):

PROGRAMMED EPROM KIT

(assigned by GRS) :

PROGRAMMED EPROM(s)
(assigned by GRS) :

Use this worksheet in conjunction with Software Program Options

to select the options required for an Intermediate Module.

Option 1: Signal Type (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: Search light
2: Color light
3: Position light

Option 2: Approach Lighting (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: No approach lighting
2: Approach lighting
3: Approach lighting with loss of AC power

Option 3: Aspect Flash Rate (select 1, 2, 3 or 4)

if item 4 is selected, specify rate:
1: None
2: 50 flashes per minute
3: 60 flashes per minute
4: Other (specify)

P2160A Vol. 1 4-22 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 4: Searchlight Lamp Out (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: Not applicable
2: Mechanism remains energized
3: Mechanism de-energized

Option 5: Stick Logic (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: Stick logic not required
2: Picked stick holds opposing signal RED
3: Picked stick allows opposing signal to CLEAR

Option 6: Stick Qualify Time (select 1 or 2)

1: 4 seconds
2: 10 seconds

Option 7: Auxiliary Inputs (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: No AUX (if item 3 is selected, specify operation)
2: Standard AUX operation
3: Customer defined AUX operation

Option 8: Code 5 with Auxiliary Inputs (select 1 or 2)

1: CODE 5 repeated with de-energized AUX input
2: CODE 5 not repeated with de-energized AUX input

Option 9: Cab Signal (select 1 or 2)

1: No cab signal
2: Cab signal

Option 10: Cab Signal Turn On (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: Not used (if item 3 is selected, specify code(s))
2: CODE 6 or no code
3: Specified code(s) (specify)

Option 11: Synchronization (select 1 or 2)

1: Asynchronous
2: Synchronous

Option 12: Cross check (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: No cross check
2: Signal cross check
3: Full cross check

P2160A Vol. 1 4-23 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUESTIONNAIRE

BULB FILIMENT INTACT

LEGEND :
BULB FILIMENT OPEN

EAST EAST EAST EAST EAST WEST WEST

CODE DESIRED A B DISPLAYED CODE CAB
IN ASPECT LO LO ASPECT OUT OUT

NO CODE

STICK

P2160A Vol. 1 4-24 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUESTIONNAIRE

BULB FILIMENT INTACT

LEGEND :
BULB FILIMENT OPEN

WEST WEST WEST WEST WEST EAST EAST

CODE DESIRED A B DISPLAYED CODE CAB
IN ASPECT LO LO ASPECT OUT OUT

NO CODE

STICK

P2160A Vol. 1 4-25 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

PROGRAM WORKSHEET EXAMPLE

Color Light Example

SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS

INTERMEDIATE:

CUSTOMER:
LOCATION:
DATE:
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION: 2
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION: 27359-16 GR 2
WIRE WRAP ID CODE
(assigned by GRS):
PROGRAMMED EPROM KIT
(assigned by GRS):
PROGRAMMED EPROM(s)
(assigned by GRS):

Use this worksheet in conjunction with Software Program Options

to select the options required for an Intermediate Module.

Option 1: Signal Type (select 1, 2 or 3) 2

2: (color light)

Option 2: Approach Lighting (select 1, 2 or 3) 1

1: (signals always lit)

Option 3: Aspect Flash Rate (select 1, 2, 3 or 4) 3

3: if item 4 is selected, specify rate: (60 flashes per minute)

Option 4: Searchlight Lamp Out (select 1, 2 or 3) 1

1: (not applicable)

P2160A Vol. 1 4-26 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 5: Stick Logic (select 1, 2 or 3) 3

3: (picked stick allows opposing signal to clear)

Option 6: Stick Qualify Time (select 1 or 2) 2

2: (10 sec qualify time)

Option 7: Auxiliary Inputs (select 1, 2 or 3) 1

1: (Aux inputs not required)

Option 8: CODE 5 with Auxiliary Inputs (select 1 or 2) 1

1: (CODE 5 repeated, not applicable)

Option 9: Cab Signal (select 1 or 2) 1

1: No cab signaling)

Option 10: Cab Signal Turn On (select 1, 2 or 3) 1

1: (No cab signaling)

Option 11: Synchronization (select 1 or 2) 1

1: (Asynchronous operation)

Option 12: Cross check (select 1, 2 or 3) 1

1: (No cross check)

P2160A Vol. 1 4-27 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 EXAMPLE: GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUEATIONAIRE (COLORLIGHT)

R = RED F = FLASH
BULB FILIMENT INTACT
LEGEND : Y = YELLOW D = DARK
BULB FILIMENT OPEN
G = GREEN N/A = NOT APPLICABLE

EAST EAST EAST EAST EAST WEST WEST

CODE DESIRED A B DISPLAYED CODE CAB
IN ASPECT LO LO ASPECT OUT OUT

NO CODE R R 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A
D 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A

1 R R 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A
D 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A

7 G G 7 N/A *
IF Y IS OUT
N/A N/A N/A
DISPLAY R
Y* 7 N/A WITH CODE
2 XMIT
N/A N/A N/A

4 FY FY 7 N/A
N/A N/A N/A
R 2 N/A
N/A N/A N/A

3 R R 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A
D 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A

2 Y Y 7 N/A
N/A N/A N/A
R 2 N/A
N/A N/A N/A

8 R R 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A
D 1 N/A
N/A N/A N/A

STICK R R 2 N/A
N/A N/A N/A
D 2 N/A
N/A N/A N/A

P2160A Vol. 1 4-28 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 EXAMPLE: GENRAKODE CODE AND ASPECT QUEATIONAIRE (COLORLIGHT)

R = RED F = FLASH
BULB FILIMENT INTACT
LEGEND : Y = YELLOW D = DARK
BULB FILIMENT OPEN
G = GREEN N/A = NOT APPLICABLE

WEST WEST WEST WEST WEST EAST EAST

CODE DESIRED A B DISPLAYED CODE CAB
IN ASPECT LO LO ASPECT OUT OUT
A B
NO CODE R/R R/R 1 N/A
R/D 1 N/A
D/R 1 N/A
D/D 1 N/A

1 R/R R/R 1 N/A

R/D 1 N/A
D/R 1 N/A
D/D 1 N/A

7 G/R G/R 7 N/A *

IF ’A’ Y IS
G/D 7 N/A
OPEN,
Y/R* 7 N/A D/R, OR D/D &
XMIT CODE 2
Y/D* 7 N/A

4 Y/G Y/G 7 N/A

Y/R 7 N/A
D/Y 7 N/A
D/R 2 N/A

3 R/R R/R 1 N/A

R/D 1 N/A
D/R 1 N/A
D/D 1 N/A

2 Y/R Y/R 7 N/A

Y/D 7 N/A
R/R 2 N/A
R/D 2 N/A

8 R/R R/R 1 N/A

R/D 1 N/A
D/R 1 N/A
D/D 1 N/A

STICK R/R R/R 2 N/A

R/D 2 N/A
D/R 2 N/A
D/D 2 N/A

P2160A Vol. 1 4-29 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

DESCRIPTION OF CODE & ASPECT CHART FOR COLOR LIGHT EXAMPLE

East Bound Signal

When NO CODE is received from the EAST, the EAST bound signal will be set to RED (R), and
CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to
DARK (D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST.

When CODE 1 is received from the EAST, the EAST bound signal will be set to RED (R), and
CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to
DARK (D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST.

When CODE 7 is received from the EAST, the EAST bound signal will be set to GREEN (G),
and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the GREEN lamp is open, the signal will be set
to YELLOW (Y), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the GREEN and YELLOW
lamps are open, the signal will be set to RED (R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the WEST.
If the GREEN, YELLOW and RED lamps are open, the signal will be set to DARK (D), and
CODE 2 will be transmitted to the WEST.

When CODE 4 is received from the EAST, the EAST bound signal will be set to FLASHING
YELLOW (FY), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the YELLOW lamp is open,
the signal will be set to RED (R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the
YELLOW and RED lamps are open, the signal will be set to DARK (D), and CODE 2 will be
transmitted to the WEST.

When CODE 3 is received from the EAST, the EAST bound signal will be set to RED (R), and
CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to
DARK (D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST.

When CODE 2 is received from the EAST, the EAST bound signal will be set to YELLOW (Y),
and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the YELLOW lamp is open, the signal will be
set to RED (R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the YELLOW and RED lamps
are open, the signal will be set to DARK (D), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the WEST.

When CODE 8 is received from the EAST, the EAST bound signal will be set to RED (R), and
CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST. If the RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to
DARK (D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the WEST.

When the EAST stick is picked, the EAST bound signal will be set to RED (R), and CODE 2 will
be transmitted to the WEST. If the RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to DARK (D), and
CODE 2 will be transmitted to the WEST.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-30 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

West Bound Signal

When NO CODE is received from the WEST, the WEST BOUND signal will be set to RED over
RED (R/R), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP RED lamp is open, the
signal will be set to DARK over RED (D/R), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If
the BOTTOM RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to RED over DARK (R/D), and CODE 1
will be transmitted to the EAST. If both the TOP and BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal
will be DARK over DARK (D/D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST.

When CODE 1 is received from the WEST, the WEST BOUND signal will be set to RED over
RED (R/R), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP RED lamp is open, the
signal will be set to DARK over RED (D/R), the CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the
BOTTOM RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to RED over DARK (R/D), and CODE 1 will
be transmitted to the EAST. If both the TOP and BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal will
be DARK over DARK (D/D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST.

When CODE 7 is received from the WEST, the WEST BOUND signal will be set to GREEN
over RED (G/R), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP GREEN lamp is
open, the signal will be set to YELLOW over RED (Y/R), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the
EAST. If both the TOP GREEN and the TOP YELLOW lamps are open, the signal will be RED
over RED (R/R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP GREEN, TOP
YELLOW and TOP RED lamps are open, the signal will be DARK over RED (D/R), and CODE
2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the BOTTOM RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to
GREEN over DARK (G/D), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP GREEN
and the BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal will be set to YELLOW over DARK (Y/D),
and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP GREEN, TOP YELLOW and
BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal will be RED over DARK (R/D), and CODE 2 will be
transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP GREEN, TOP YELLOW, TOP RED, and BOTTOM RED
lamps are open, the signal will be DARK over DARK (D/D), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to
the EAST.

When CODE 4 is received from the WEST, the WEST BOUND signal will be set to YELLOW
over GREEN (Y/G), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP YELLOW lamp
is open, the signal will be set to DARK over YELLOW (D/Y), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to
the EAST. If both the TOP YELLOW and the BOTTOM YELLOW lamps are open, the signal
will be DARK over RED (D/R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP
YELLOW, BOTTOM YELLOW and BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal will be DARK
over DARK (D/D), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the BOTTOM GREEN
lamp is open, the signal will be set to YELLOW over RED (Y/R), and CODE 7 will be
transmitted to the EAST. If the BOTTOM GREEN and the BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the
signal will be set to YELLOW over DARK (Y/D), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the EAST.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-31 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

When CODE 3 is received from the WEST, the WEST BOUND signal will be set to RED over
RED (R/R), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP RED lamp is open, the
signal will be set to DARK over RED (D/R), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If
the BOTTOM RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to RED over DARK (R/D), and CODE 1
will be transmitted to the EAST. If both the TOP and BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal
will be DARK over DARK (D/D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST.

When CODE 2 is received from the WEST, the WEST BOUND signal will be set to YELLOW
over RED (Y/R), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP YELLOW lamp is
open, the signal will be set to RED over RED (R/R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the
EAST. If both the TOP YELLOW and the TOP RED lamps are open, the signal will be DARK
over RED (D/R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the BOTTOM RED lamp is
open, the signal will be set to YELLOW over DARK (Y/D), and CODE 7 will be transmitted to
the EAST. If the TOP YELLOW, TOP RED and the BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal
will be set to DARK over DARK (D/D), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If both
the TOP YELLOW and the BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal will be RED over DARK
(R/D), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST.

When CODE 8 is received from the WEST, the WEST BOUND signal will be set to RED over
RED (R/R), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP RED lamp is open, the
signal will be set to DARK over RED (D/R), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST. If
the BOTTOM RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to RED over DARK (R/D), and CODE 1
will be transmitted to the EAST. If both the TOP and BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal
will be DARK over DARK (D/D), and CODE 1 will be transmitted to the EAST.

When the WEST stick is picked, the WEST bound signal will be set to RED over RED (R/R),
and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the TOP RED lamp is open, the signal will be
set to DARK over RED (D/R), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST. If the BOTTOM
RED lamp is open, the signal will be set to RED over DARK (R/D), and CODE 2 will be
transmitted to the EAST. If both the TOP and BOTTOM RED lamps are open, the signal will be
DARK over DARK (D/D), and CODE 2 will be transmitted to the EAST.

ORDERING INFORMATION – INTERMEDIATE MODULE

To order an Intermediate Module, first select the desired hardware components by reviewing the
options that are available as listed above. Then fill in the Software Program Worksheet with the
selected software program options from above. Consult a GRS Sales Rep. for specific part
numbers and ordering details.

Note: An Auxiliary I/O Board will be required if: the auxiliary inputs are used, the ac
power detect input is used, or the cab signal outputs are used. If the auxiliary
inputs are not required in the application and an Auxiliary I/O Board is installed,
they must be connected to 12-V DC battery energy.

P2160A Vol. 1 4-32 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 5

REPEATER MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION

The Repeater Module, a regenerative repeater, receives signals from the rails on one side of an
insulated joint and transmits a regenerated copy of the same signal to the other side of the joint.
The Repeater Module transmits and receives from both the EAST and the WEST directions.

The Repeater Module uses the same motherboard as the dual Control Point Module, but not all of
the AAR posts are present. This allows a repeater case to be used as a control point case if the
missing AAR posts are installed. Likewise, a dual control point case can be used as a repeater
case.

The Repeater Module is available in two configurations: Synchronous Repeater and

Asynchronous Repeater.

Synchronous Repeater:

The Synchronous Repeater transmits on one side about 48 milliseconds after receiving the start of
a code on the other side. This type of repeater reduces the overall response time of a block of
track circuits by providing the shortest delay time between reception of a code and transmission
of the code into the next track circuit. Since transmission is started before the complete reception
of a code, any received code that does not meet the decoder tolerances causes the transmission on
the opposite side of the joint to be terminated.

CODE 5 can only be repeated by a Synchronous Repeater, not initiated or terminated. If CODE
5 is received, it is transmitted into the next track circuit. If it is not received, it is not repeated
into the next track circuit. The CODE 5 switches on the CPU board must be set to allow CODE
5 repeating, or the program will not run. The correct setting is switch A on, B off, C on, and D
off. See Figure 10-1.

The number of consecutive Synchronous Repeater locations is limited and is related to the codes
that will be used within the block. From the following chart, locate all the codes used within the
block.

CODE MAX NUMBER OF

USED SYNC. REPEATERS
7 6
4 5
3 4
2 3
8 2

P2160A Vol. 1 5-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

From the set of codes used, the code which allows the least number of repeaters indicates the
maximum number of repeaters allowable. For example, if CODES 7, 4, and 3 are used within the
block, the maximum number of repeaters is four (because CODE 3 allows the least number of
repeaters).

Asynchronous Repeater:

The Asynchronous Repeater transmits on one side anywhere between 0 and 2.8 seconds after
receiving a code on the other side. The received code is fully decoded and, if it falls within the
tolerances of a valid code, is transmitted on the other side of the next transmission cycle. Since
transmission is started after a code has been completely decoded, no code will be transmitted if an
invalid code is received.

The CODE 5 switches on the CPU board determine if CODE 5 will be repeated, terminated, or
initiated.

The number of consecutive Asynchronous Repeaters that can be used in one block is unlimited
because the transmission time on one side of the repeater is not synchronized to the reception of
codes on the other side.

With the addition of an Auxiliary I/O Board, a number of functions can be added to the basic
repeating function. EAST and WEST auxiliary inputs are provided typically to cause the
transmitted code to be downgraded. These inputs are typically used for equipment such as switch
circuit controllers, slide fence detectors, high-water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc.,
especially where the signaling system must be informed of various external conditions. This input
can also be used for other functions where special signaling conditions arise.

Cab signal outputs are provided for the EAST and the WEST direction. These outputs, located
on the Auxiliary I/O Board, interface with the Genrakode Cab Signal Module and provide the
coded cab signal rates. Optionally, the cab signal outputs can be used to energize a relay when a
particular code or set of codes are decoded.

AAR terminal layout and circuit board assignments are shown in the module’s layout and
associated parts listing in Section 1, of Volume 2.

INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD

The following page provides a correlation between the board LEDs and the functions of each.

P2160A Vol. 1 5-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 REPEATER MODULE
CPU BOARD LED DEFINITION

WEST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Status : ALO N/A (off)

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP WEST Aux input energize when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK WEST track occupied when lit

RST = CPU Reset (when on) or Diagnostic mode (when flashing)

POR N/A (off) (N/A (on) with Aux I/O board installed)

EAST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Status : ALO N/A (off)

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP EAST Aux input energized when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK EAST track occupied when lit

Note: When the CPU is reset, all LEDs will be on, then "count down" until only the
RST LED is lit.
N/A = not applicable

P2160A Vol. 1 5-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

TERMINAL DEFINITIONS

The Repeater Module uses the same AAR terminal arrangement as the Control Point Module.
See Figure 5-1. It has only 14 AAR terminals. The rows are referred to by TB1, TB2, or TB3
with row TB1 being the bottom most row. The following lists all the terminals by function,
followed by the terminal location in parentheses.

B (TB1-1) B12 input connection for the positive battery terminal.

N (TB1-16) N12 input connection for the negative battery terminal.

W TK+ (TB1-2) Connection to the positive rail of the WEST track.

W TK- (TB1-3) Connection to the negative rail of the WEST track.

W RLY+ (TB1-4)
West Vital Power Controller (VPC) positive voltage terminal (isolated from the battery) used
as the common terminal for the WEST cab signal output or optional WEST decoded output
relay.

E TK+ (TB1-14)
Connection to the positive rail of the EAST track.

E TK- (TB1-15)
Connection to the negative rail of the EAST track.

E RLY+ (TB1-13)
Positive voltage terminal (isolated from the battery) used as the common terminal for the EAST
cab signal output or optional EAST decoded output relay. Only the WEST VPC board is used
in the module. It is wired internally to both W RLY+ and E RLY+ AAR posts.

W AUX+ (TB3-7)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to W AUX- (TB3-8).
Refer to Section 5, Repeater Module – Software Program Options for operation.

W AUX- (TB3-8)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 5, Repeater Module
– Software Program Options for operation.

P2160A Vol. 1 5-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 E AUX+ (TB3-9)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to E AUX- (TB3-10).
Refer to Section 5, Repeater Module – Software Program Options for operation.

E AUX- (TB3-10)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fences,
high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 5, Repeater Module
– Software Program Options for operation.

W CAB (TB2-8)
Current sink (active low) output used to interface the Repeater Module to the optional Cab
Signal Module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the WEST
track circuit. This output is referenced to WEST Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, W
RLY+ (TB1-4).

E CAB (TB2-9)
Current sink (active low) output used to interface the Repeater Module to the optional CAB
SIGNAL module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the EAST
track circuit. This output is referenced to EAST Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, E
RLY+ (TB1-13).

P2160A Vol. 1 5-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

P2160A Vol. 1
TB3
W W W W W W W W E E E E E E E E
C1RLY C2RLY C3RLY C4RLY REF CNT1 AUX+ AUX- AUX+ AUX- REF CNT1 C1RLY C2RLY C3RLY C4RLY

TB2

5-6
W W W W W W E E E E E E
WHR W CAB E CAB EHR
C5RLY C7RLY C8RLY CNT2 CNT3 CNT4 CNT2 CNT3 CNT4 C5RLY C7RLY C8RLY
(W C6 RLY) (E C6RLY)

TB1
W W W W E E E E
B WEST WEST W RLY+ E RLY+ EAST EAST N
CNT5 CNT6 CNT7 CNT8 CNT5 CNT6 CNT7 CNT8
TK+ TK- TK+ TK-
(SER.1) (SER.2)

Figure 5-1. Repeater Module AAR Terminals

ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

The Genrakode Repeater Module is available in two hardware configurations. The first
configuration includes all the required hardware to operate a repeater module without any
auxiliary functions (auxiliary inputs, cab signal outputs, decoded outputs). The second
configuration is identical to the first, with the addition of an Auxiliary I/O Board.

The addition of an Auxiliary I/O Board provides EAST and WEST two wire auxiliary inputs and
EAST and WEST cab signal outputs, or the option to have a relay output repeating the decoded
codes. Auxiliary inputs are typically used to downgrade the signaling system due to an external
condition. The cab signal outputs interface with the Cab Signal module and generate the
appropriate cab signal rates. Or as an option, the cab signal outputs can be used to energize a
relay when a particular code (or set of codes) is decoded.

The basic part number for the Repeater Module is 27359-18-XX with the desired configuration
called out by the group number. Table 5-1 lists the components available for the repeater module.

Table 5-1. Repeater Module Components.

NAME GRS PART #

CONV/RCVR 59473-833-01 and –02
VPC 59473-835-01
REG/FILTER 59473-834-01
CPU 59473-831-01
AUX I/O I 59473-837-01
AUX I/O II 59473-958-01
AUX I/O III 31166-043-01

SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS

The use of microprocessor technology allows any one particular Genrakode module to perform in
many different ways, depending on the software that is installed. Different operating
characteristics can be selected by simply installing a different EPROM(s). A list of the six
standard options that are available for the Repeater Module follows. Use this list in conjunction
with the Software Program Worksheets to select the options that are required. An * next to an
item indicates that this is the standard option type.

P2160A Vol. 1 5-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 1: Mode of Operation

This option determines if the Repeater will operate either synchronously or asynchronously. If
Item 1 is selected, the Repeater will be synchronous. If Item 2 is selected, the Repeater will be
asynchronous.

* 1. Synchronous operation
2. Asynchronous operation

Option 2: Auxiliary Inputs (E Aux, W Aux)

This option determines if the auxiliary inputs will be used. If item 1 is selected, the auxiliary inputs
are not required. If item 2 is selected, the auxiliary inputs will be read and an Auxiliary I/O Board
is required. If the auxiliary inputs are not required but an Auxiliary I/O Board is installed, both
EAST and WEST auxiliary inputs must be connected to 12 V DC energy.

* 1. NO AUX INPUTS
2. AUX INPUTS - operation as follows:

if WEST AUX input is de-energized:

WEST CODE OUT - code 1 and 6
EAST CODE OUT - no effect

if EAST AUX input is de-energized:

EAST CODE OUT - code 1 and 6
WEST CODE OUT - no effect

Note: CODE 6 is only transmitted once.

Option 3: Code 5 with Auxiliary Inputs

This option determines if the code 5 will be repeated with the absence of an auxiliary input. The
item provides a block indication of the auxiliary input status. If item 2 is selected, when either
auxiliary input is not energized, code 5 will not be repeated in either direction, providing an
indication that the block is not clear.

* 1. code 5 repeated in both directions when auxiliary input de-energized.

2. code 5 not repeated in both directions when auxiliary input de-energized.

Note: If the code 5 switches on the CPU board are set to initiate CODE 5, a de-
energized auxiliary input will disable CODE 5 transmission. If the code 5 auxiliary
input will not cause CODE 5 transmission.

P2160A Vol. 1 5-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 4: Cab Signal

This option determines if the cab signal outputs will be used. If item 1 is selected, the cab signal
outputs are not required. If item 2 is selected, the cab signal outputs will be controlled and an
Auxiliary I/O Board is required. If the cab signal outputs are required, the cab signal rates must
be indicated on the program worksheet.

* 1. NO CAB SIGNAL
2. CAB SIGNAL

Option 5: Cab Signal Turn On

This option determines when the cab signal generators will be turned on (if used).

* 1. cab signal not used

2. cab signal generator turned on with CODE 6 (tumble down) or NO CODE received.
3. cab signal generator turned on with selected vital code (specify code)

Option 6: Decoded Output

This option allows a relay to be energized using the cab signal outputs on an Auxiliary I/O Board.
This output can be energized when a specified code is received. Note that if a relay is required to
be energized, the cab signaling option must be forfeited since the same output terminal is used for
both functions. If item 1 is selected, the decoded relay output is not required and the output may
be used for cab signaling, if required. If item 2 is selected, the cab signal output will be energized
when the specified code(s) is received. Note that the EAST and WEST cab signal outputs will
operate identically.

* 1. No decoded output
2. Decoded output (specify codes)

P2160A Vol. 1 5-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS

Repeater :

CUSTOMER:

LOCATION:

DATE:

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION:

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION:

WIRE WRAP ID CODE

(assigned by GRS) :

PROGRAMMED EPROM KIT

(assigned by GRS) :

PROGRAMMED EPROM(s)
(assigned by GRS) :

Use this worksheet in conjunction with Software Program Options

to select the options required for a Repeater Module.

Option 1: Operation (select 1 or 2)

1: Synchronous
2: Asynchronous

Option 2: Auxiliary Inputs (select 1 or 2)

1: No Aux inputs
2: Aux inputs

Option 3: CODE 5 with Auxiliary Inputs (select 1 or 2)

1: CODE 5 repeated with de-energized Aux input(s)
2: CODE 5 not repeated with de-energized Aux input(s)

P2160A Vol. 1 5-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 4: Cab Signal (select 1 or 2)
1: No cab signal
2: Cab signal
if option 2 is selected, specify rates below:
(select 50,75,120,180,270,420)

EAST WEST
CODE OUT CAB RATE CAB RATE
1 ______ ______
7 ______ ______
4 ______ ______
3 ______ ______
2 ______ ______
8 ______ ______
NO CODE ______ ______

Option 5: Cab Signal Turn On (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: Not applicable
2: CODE 6 or no code
3: Specified code(s) (specify) ___________

Option 6: Decoded Output (select 1 or 2)

1: No decoded output
2: Decoded output (specify code(s))
if option 2 is selected, specify codes for relay to
be energized: _____________

ORDERING INFORMATION – REPEATER MODULE

To order a Repeater Module, first select the desired hardware components by reviewing the
options that are available as listed above. Then fill in the Software Program Worksheet with the
selected software program options from above. Consult a GRS Sales Rep. for specific part
numbers and ordering details.

Note: An Auxiliary I/O Board will be required if: the auxiliary inputs are used, the cab signal
outputs are used, or if a decoded output is required. If an Auxiliary I/O Board is required for cab
signaling or decoded outputs, the auxiliary inputs will also be provided. If the application does
not require the use of the auxiliary inputs, then they must be connected to 12 V DC battery
energy.

P2160A Vol. 1 5-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

P2160A Vol. 1 5-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 6

SWITCH LOCK MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The objective of the Switch Lock Module is to allow safe entry of a train from a siding to a
mainline. Whenever the trainman wishes to leave the siding, he must open the door on the switch
lock and request permission to get on the mainline. The Genrakode Switch Lock Module will
make sure that conditions are safe before energizing the lock relay and releasing the lock. When
the lock relay is energized, the switch lever can be moved (and thus the points) so that the train
can come out of the siding and on to the mainline. The Switch Lock Module inputs are: unlock
request, NWP from the switch circuit controller, internal overlay remote overlay, field
programmable long timer, codes received from EAST and WEST and field programmable unlock
code selection.

When an unlock request has been made, and a siding to mainline move is required, the lock relay
is energized according to one of the following conditions:

a) Permissive unlock codes are received from both directions,

or
b) After running the long timer, if permissive unlock codes are missing from either direction.

Note: Throughout this section, permissive unlock codes are referred to as UC codes
(UNLOCK CODES), and restrictive codes are referred to as LC codes (LOCK
CODES). LC codes are more restrictive then UC codes.

Typically the vital code hierarchy is 8, 2, 3, 4, or 7, of which code 8 is the most restrictive, and
code 7 is the least restrictive and applies to both signal aspects and lock release operation. The
Switch Lock I/O Board contains field selectable jumpers which can be used for Switch Lock
operation to define the point in the code hierarchy where the change from LC codes to UC codes
is made.

For a train movement from the mainline to the siding, the unlock request allows the series overlay
circuit to become active. Upon detection of the train on the mainline by the series overlay circuit,
the lock is released without having to run time.

An integral part of the Genrakode Switch Lock Module is a repeater which transmits codes to the
EAST which have been received from the WEST and transmits codes to the WEST which have
been received from the EAST. Refer to the repeater section for a more detailed description for
this particular function.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Each of the following conditions will disable the repeating action of the module:

a) Unlock request.
b) The NWP input indicates the switch circuit controller is out of correspondence.
c) Internal overlay shows occupancy and codes received from both EAST & WEST.
d) Remote overlay shows occupancy and codes received from both EAST & WEST.

Whenever the repeating operation is disabled, CODE 6 (tumble down code) is transmitted in both
directions. Note that neither the internal short timer nor the long timer is run in a mainline to
siding move, i.e., whenever the remote or internal overlay shows occupancy.

The repeating operation is again enabled when ALL of the following conditions are satisfied:

a) There is no unlock request,

b) The NWP switch is in correspondence,
c) The short timer is reset, and
d) The long timer is reset.

Codes are received/transmitted from/to the rails via the receiver converter board and are decoded
by the CPU board. Out of the five vital codes that are received, one or more can be designated as
unlock codes (referred to as UC codes), the rest are considered restrictive and referred to as LC
codes. In a siding to mainline move, the system energizes the lock release relay only when UC
codes are received from both directions, assuming that a unlock request has been made. If vital
signal clearing codes are not present or a LC code is present on either or both received directions,
the field settable timer is run before the lock relay is energized.

SUMMARY OF SWITCH LOCK MODES:

a) Mainline to siding move – Lock relay is energized by overlay track circuit detection when
request is made; neither short or long timer is run; repeater is disabled.

b) Siding to mainline move – If UC codes are received from both directions when request is
made, the lock relay is energized after short timer is run. Only the short timer is run,
repeater is disabled.

c) Siding to mainline move – If unlock codes are not received from either direction, the long
timer is run; lock will be energized when the long timer has expired. Repeater is disabled.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Switch Lock Timer

The Timer Board contains the "long timer", and the times are field selected when the system is
initially installed. The timer board allows programming of a time delay which has to occur before
the lock relay is energized in a siding to mainline move. The long timer is activated if UC codes
are absent from either side when the request is made. Once the long timer expires, the lock relay is
energized. The board contains four columns of jumpers, and each column has ten positions. The
columns are for unit seconds, ten seconds, unit minutes, and ten minutes. Note that there always
has to be four jumpers installed to allow the timer to operate.

As an example in setting up the long timer for four minutes and 23 seconds:

a) place a jumper in row 0 of the ten minute column

b) place a jumper in row 4 of the one minute column
c) place a jumper in row 2 of the ten second column
d) place a jumper in row 3 of the one second column

If the long timer is not to be used, i.e., zero time, then the four jumpers have to be located in the 0
positions of all four columns. Once the timer is configured, a tamper proof cover with a seal is
placed over the jumper blocks.

The short timer cannot be set up with this board but is internally programmed typically for 20
seconds. When the Switch Lock Module is running the long timer, the LED on the timer board
will flash on and off. After the timer has expired, the LED will remain lit, and it will be turned off
after the repeater has been enabled. Neither the short timer or the long timer is run in a mainline
to siding move. Before the time that is set is read, the CPU checks the Timer Board to make sure
there aren’t any shorts, opens and that the correct number of jumpers (4 jumpers total, only one
jumper per column) are located on the board. When a CPU reset occurs, if there are any problems
with the timer board, the timing LED will remain on. This is an indication that there is a
malfunction on the board or the jumpers have not been placed correctly on the jumper blocks.

SWITCH LOCK INPUTS, OUTPUTS AND UNLOCK CODE SELECTION

The Switch Lock I/O Board contains 3 inputs, 4 outputs, and jumpers for EAST and WEST
LC/UC selection.

Inputs

The inputs on the Switch Lock are optically isolated from the digital circuitry. Whenever there is
energy on one of these inputs, the CPU is able to circulate diversified data through the input
circuitry, acknowledging its presence. Inputs are read every 8 ms.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Unlock Request Input – This input is referenced to 12-V common, battery +12-V energy
indicates to the system that an unlock request has occurred. Whenever energy is sensed on this
input the repeater is disabled. AAR label and location: UNL REQ INP, TB1-4.

Remote Overlay Input – This input is isolated and presence of energy indicates that the external
overlay is occupied. The system reacts to this input in the same manner as if the internal overlay
showed occupancy. AAR labels and locations: +RMTE OL INP, TB2-4. -RMTE OL INP,
TB2-5.

NWP Input – This input is connected to the switch circuit controller and if energy is removed, the
repeater will be disabled. AAR labels and locations: +NWP INP, TB2-2. -NWP INP, TB2-3.

Outputs

Each of the outputs is isolated from the digital circuitry by opto-isolators, and each output
contains circuitry to verify the state of each output. The outputs are sink types and referenced to
+VPC TB1-7. The states of the outputs are checked by the CPU every 8 ms, to insure that they
are operating correctly. Every 2.8 seconds the outputs are cycle checked and again their states
are checked. This is to verify that the CPU has control of these outputs. This activity takes about
1 ms and is faster than the reaction time of the relay.

Lamp Output – Provides energy return for a lamp of up to 25 watts. The lamp is turned on when
the lock relay is energized. Only used for locks that have a lamp. AAR label and location: PBKE
LMP OUT, TB1-6.

Lock Relay Output – Provides energy return for the lock coil. Coil resistance can be as low as 50
ohms. AAR label and location: LK RLY OUT, TB1-5.

Remote Overlay Output – Is energized to provide current sinking output whenever the internal
overlay shows occupancy. Coil resistance can be as low as 50 ohms. AAR label and location: OL
RLY OUT, TB2-7.

Relay Output – Is used as general purpose relay output for certain applications. Coil resistance
can be as low as 50 ohms. AAR label and location: OUTPUT, TB2-6.

Selecting Unlock Codes

There are two groups of jumper sockets for both directions EAST and WEST. There has to be
one jumper installed for each direction. The jumper sockets are labeled on the Switch Lock I/O
board as:

P2160A Vol. 1 6-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 WEST: EAST:
A - 8,2,3,4,7 A - 8,2,3,4,7
B - 2,3,4,7 B - 2,3,4,7
C - 3,4,7 C - 3,4,7
D - 4,7 D - 4,7
E-7 E-7

As an example, if in response to a unlock request for a siding to mainline move and the lock is to
be released without running time when codes 4, or 7 are received from the WEST and codes 3,4
or 7 are received from the EAST, then a jumper is placed in the D slot for the WEST and another
in the C slot for the EAST. In a siding to mainline move, if UC codes are received from both
directions then the lock relay will be energized after tumble down is transmitted in both directions
and 20 seconds have expired.

INTERPRETING LEDS ON SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD

There are three groups of LEDs on the Switch Lock I/O Board. Refer to figure 13-4 for LED
locations on Switch Lock I/O Board.

The first group is located about two inches from the edge of the board and is used to indicate the
status of the three inputs. These LEDs will be on whenever there is energy on the corresponding
input. Input LEDs are designated as follows:

PC Board Label Function Location

UN. REQ. Unlock Request input --top LED--

NWP NWP Input
RMTE. OL. Remote Overlay input --bottom LED--

The next group contains four LEDS; they identify the states of the outputs. When one of these
LEDs is on, it means the CPU has energized the corresponding output.

PC Board Label Function Location

LR Lock Relay Output --top LED--

OL Overlay Relay Output
OT Output Relay Output
LP Lamp Output --bottom LED--

P2160A Vol. 1 6-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The third group is located on bottom of the board by the edge and is used for LC/UC indication
and short timer status.

PC Board Label Function Location

WA WEST LC code received --top LED--

WB WEST UC code received
EA EAST LC code received
EB EAST UC code received
ST Short timer --bottom LED--

The LEDs indicate the following:

WA-on, WB-off: WEST LC code received.

WA-off, WB-on: WEST UC code received.
WA-on, WB-on: No vital codes (8,2,3,4,7) received from WEST.
EA-on, EB-off: EAST LC code received.
EA-off, EB-on: EAST UC code received.
EA-on, EB-on: No vital codes (8,2,3,4,7) received from EAST.
ST-off: Short timer is reset.
ST-flashing: Short timer is running (20 seconds)
ST-on: Short timer has expired, i.e., after 20 seconds the LED will be on.

OVERLAY FUNCTION

The series overlay board detects the presence of the train in the vicinity of the switch on the
mainline. LED (CR1) on the board indicates when the overlay circuitry has detected the presence
of the train. The LED turns on when occupancy has been detected. AAR labels and locations:
SERIES TK+, TB1-12. SERIES TK-,TB1-13.

INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD

The CPU board that runs the Genrakode Switch Lock Module, employs SAL methods for safety
and in general works the same as described in the board description section. Some of the LEDs
identify specific Switch Lock activity, and as such, have redefined functions for Switch Lock
operation. The function of all the LEDs is explained on the next two pages.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 REPEATING SWITCH LOCK MODULE
CPU BOARD LED DEFINITION

WEST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Status : ALO Overlay fault when lit

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP WEST Aux input energize when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK WEST track occupied when lit

RST = CPU Reset (when on) or Diagnostic mode (when flashing)

POR N/A (off) (N/A (on) with Aux I/O board installed)

EAST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Status : ALO NWP energized when lit

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP EAST Aux input energized when lit (only with Aux I/O board installed)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK EAST track occupied when lit

Note: When the CPU is reset, all LEDs will be on, then "count down" until only the RST
LED is lit.

N/A = not applicable

P2160A Vol. 1 6-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 NON-REPEATING SWITCH LOCK MODULE
CPU BOARD LED DEFINITION
WEST Code 1 Decoded
" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 "
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "
SLOW FLASH when W EXO output energized
FAST FLASH when W EXO output de-energized
WEST Code 1 Out
" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 "
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Status : ALO Unlock request de-energized & NWP input energized when lit
" " : BLO Short timer READ when lit
" " : INP Long timer READ when lit
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK N/A (off)

RST = CPU Reset (when on) or Diagnostic mode (when flashing)

POR N/A (off) (N/A (on) with Aux I/O board installed)

EAST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 "
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "
SLOW FLASH when WEST Aux input energized
FAST FLASH when WEST Aux input de-energized
EAST Code 1 Out
" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 "
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Status : ALO NWP input energized when lit

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP N/A (off)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK N/A (off)

Note: When the CPU is reset, all LEDs will be on, then "count down" until only the RST
LED is lit.

N/A = not applicable

SLOW FLASH = 1 flash every 2 seconds
FAST FLASH = 5 flashes per second.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

TERMINAL DEFINITIONS

The Switch Lock Module has 32 AAR terminals arranged in two rows of 16. See Figure 6-1 at
the end of this section. The rows are referred to by TB1 or TB2 with row TB1 being the bottom
most row. A list of all the terminals by function and terminal location in parentheses follows.

B (TB1-1) B12 input connection for the positive battery terminal.

N (TB1-16) N12 input connection for the negative battery terminal.

WEST TK+ (TB1-2) Connection to the positive rail of the WEST track.

WEST TK- (TB1-3) Connection to the negative rail of the WEST track.

+ VPC (TB1-7)
Vital Power Controller (VPC) positive voltage terminal (isolated from the battery ) used as the
common connection for all outputs (lock relay, overlay relay, BPKE lamp, EAST and WEST
cab signal, EAST and WEST expansion) and local inputs (EAST and WEST expansion).

PBKE LMP OUT (TB1-6)

Current sink (active low) output referenced to the Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage,
+ VPC (TB1-7). This terminal is used to energize a lamp to indicate that the unlock relay is
energized.

LK RLY OUT (TB1-5)

Current sink (active low) output referenced to the Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, +
VPC (TB1-7). This terminal is used to energize the lock coil in the switch lock mechanism.

OUTPUT (TB2-6)
Current sink (active low) output referenced to the Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, +
VPC (TB1-7). This terminal can be used to energize a relay. This function is presently
available for future use.

OL RLY OUT (TB2-7)

Current sink (active low) output referenced to the Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, +
VPC (TB1-7). This terminal is used to energize a relay to indicate the status of the internal
overlay. If the output is energized, the internal overlay is shunted.

UNL REQ INP (TB1-4)

Single-wire input from positive battery voltage, B (TB1-1) to indicate a request has been made
to unlock the switch lock mechanism. A positive input is present to indicate an unlock request.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 +NWP (TB2-2)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire input for switch circuit controller. Referenced
to -NWP (TB2-3).

-NWP (TB2-3)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire input for switch circuit controller.

+RMTE OL (TB2-4)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire input to indicate occupancy when an external
overlay is used (referenced to -RMTE OL (TB2-5). No connection to this terminal when the
remote overlay is not used.

-RMTE OL (TB2-5)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire input to indicate occupancy when an external
overlay is used. This input is connected to negative energy referenced to +RMTE OL
(TB2-4). No connection to this terminal when the remote overlay is not used.

EAST TK+ (TB1-14) Connection to the positive rail of the EAST track.

EAST TK- (TB1-15) Connection to the negative rail of the EAST track.

OL/XMIT+ (TB1-10) No connection required when series overlay is used.

OL/XMIT- (TB1-11) No connection required when series overlay is used.

SERIES (OL RCVR) TK+ (TB1-12)

Connection to the positive rail for series overlay. When the series overlay is used, connect to
EAST TK+ (TB1-14) or WEST TK+, (TB1-2).

SERIES (OL RCVR) TK- (TB1-13)

Connection to the negative rail for series overlay. When the series overlay is used, connect to
EAST TK- (TB1-15) or WEST TK-, (TB1-3).

W EX I (TB2-9)
Local one-wire input. This terminal is normally unused and is provided for special signaling
applications that may arise in the future. For normal application, no connection is required.
When used, the input voltage must originate from + VPC (TB1-7).

W EX O (TB2-8)
Current sink (active low) output referenced to Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, + VPC
(TB1-7). This terminal is normally unused and is provided for special signaling applications
that may arise in the future.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 W AUX+ (TB2-10)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fence
detectors, high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to W AUX-
(TB2-11). Refer to Section 5 Repeater Module – Software Program Options for operation.
W AUX- (TB2-11)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fence
detectors, high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 5 Repeater
Module – Software Program Options for operation.
W CAB (TB1-8)
Current sink (active low) output used to interface the Repeater Module to the optional Cab
Signal Module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the WEST
track circuit. This output is referenced to Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, + VPC (TB1-
7).
E EX I (TB2-13)
Local one-wire input. This terminal is normally unused and is provided for special signaling
applications that may arise in the future. For normal application, no connection is required.
When used, the input voltage must originate from + VPC (TB1-7).
E EX O (TB2-12)
Current sink (active low) output referenced to Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, + VPC
(TB1-7). This terminal is normally unused and is provided for special signaling applications
that may arise in the future.
E AUX+ (TB2-14)
Positive input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fence
detectors, high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Referenced to E AUX-
(TB2-15). Refer to Section 5 Repeater Module – Software Program Options for operation.
E AUX- (TB2-15)
Negative input terminal of an isolated two-wire auxiliary input for downgrading the signaling
system under various conditions. Typical applications include switch controllers, slide fence
detectors, high water detectors, dragging equipment detectors, etc. Refer to Section 5
Repeater Module – Software Program Options for operation.
E CAB (TB1-9)
Current sink (active low) output used to interface the Repeater Module to the optional CAB
SIGNAL module. This output generates the appropriate coded cab signal rates for the EAST
track circuit. This output is referenced to Vital Power Controller (VPC) voltage, + VPC (TB1-
7).
(TB2-1) Unused terminal. No connection required.
(TB2-16) Unused terminal. No connection required.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

P2160A Vol. 1
TB2
+ RMTE - RMTE OUTPU OL RLY W W W W E E E E
+NWP -NWP
OL OL T OUT EXO EXI AUX + AUX - EXO EXI AUX + AUX-

6-12
TB1
UNL PBKE W E OL / XMIT OL / RCVR EAST EAST N
B WEST WEST LK RLY
TK+ TK- REQ LMP + VPC CAB CAB TK + TK - TK + TK - TK+ TK-
OUT
INP OUT

Figure 6-1. Switch Lock Module AAR Terminals

ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

The switch lock hardware configurations are divided into two types of modules. The first type of
module contains a repeater with the switch lock functions; the second type of module contains the
switch lock functions without the repeater. The Switch Lock I/O Motherboard has nine slots and
accommodates nine boards:

a) Converter/Receiver (2) EAST and WEST (PC1 & PC9)

b) Switch Lock I/O Board (PC2)
c) VPC Board (PC3)
d) Regulator/Filter Board (PC4)
e) Timer Board (PC7)
f) Internal Series Overlay Board (PC8)
g) Aux I/O Board (PC5)
h) CPU (PC6)

Switch Lock With Repeater Configurations:

For this configuration the following six boards are always required:

a) Converter/Receiver (2) EAST and WEST (PC1 & PC9)

b) Switch Lock I/O board (PC2)
c) VPC Board (PC3)
d) Regulator/Filter Board (PC4)
e) CPU (PC6)

Optional Boards – Repeater Configurations

Timer Board – This board is required so that the long timer can be programmed. With the absence
of this board, when a siding to mainline move is required, the lock will be released only when UC
codes are received from both directions.

Internal Series Overlay Board – If only the remote overlay input on the Switch Lock I/O Board is
used, then this board is not required. When this board is used the Switch Lock Module will check
the remote overlay input and the internal Series Overlay Board for track occupancy. In a mainline
to siding move, if either of these indicate occupancy, then the lock relay is energized without
running time.

Auxiliary I/O Board – This board is used for different functions, depending on the application.
Refer to Software Program Options for configurations regarding this board in this section.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-13 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The basic part number for the Switch Lock Module is 27359-17-XX with the desired
configuration called out by the group number. Table 6-1 below lists all of the components
available for the Switch Lock Module with the repeating function.

Table 6-1. Switch Lock Module Components, With Repeater.

NAME GRS PART #

CONV/RCVR 59473-833-01 AND -02
HI POWER VPC 59473-872-01
REG/FLTR 59473-834-01
CPU 59473-831-01
SW LK I/O 59473-878-01
AUX I/O I 59473-837-01
AUX I/O II 59473-958-01
AUX I/O II 31166-043-01
OVERLAY 59473-877-01
TIMER 59473-879-01

Switch Lock Without Repeater Configurations

The Switch Lock can be used without the repeating function, in which case the decoding of the
codes is done by an external module such as the Genrakode Intermediate Module. In this mode
the LC, UC and absence of the vital codes are decoded by the external module. The Switch Lock
Module and the Intermediate Module communicate this information via the Auxiliary I/O Boards
which are installed in each system.

The W EXO output is energized whenever: 1) the NWP input is energized, 2) the E AUX input is
energized, 3) the unlock request is de-energized, (no unlock request). When the W AUX input is
energized it indicates that unlock codes, are being received from the Intermediate Module. LEDs
on the CPU Board behave differently for the nonrepeating Switch Lock than the repeating
version. The first group from the top (W CODES IN) is not used. The second group (W
CODES OUT) is used to indicate whether the W EXO output is energized or not.

When the W CODES OUT LEDs are flashing at a rate of 5 flashes/second then the W EXO
output is de-energized: this indicates that the E AUX input is de-energized, NWP input is de-
energized, or a unlock request has occurred (unlock request input is energized). If the W CODES
OUT LEDs are flashing at a slower rate of 1 flash every 2 seconds, this indicates the W EXO
output is energized: this means that E AUX and NWP inputs are energized, and there is no
unlock request (unlock request input is de-energized).

P2160A Vol. 1 6-14 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The E CODES IN group of LEDs is not used. The E CODES OUT group of LEDs indicates
whether the W AUX input is energized or not. When the E CODES OUT LEDs are flashing at
the fast rate, it indicates that the W AUX input is de-energized (the Intermediate Module has
decoded LC codes). If the E CODES OUT group is flashing slow, then it indicates that the W
AUX input is energized (the Intermediate Module has decoded UC codes). When LED E ALO is
on, it shows that the CPU detected energy on the NWP input. Ignore the remaining LEDS.
When in diagnostic mode the LEDs for the nonrepeating Switch Lock behave the same as the
other modules.

When this configuration is used, the 2 Converter/Receiver boards are not required, however, the
following boards are always used:

a) Switch Lock I/O board (PC2)

b) VPC Board (PC3)
c) Regulator/Filter Board (PC4)
d) AUX I/O Board (PC5)
e) CPU board (PC6)

Optional Boards – Without Repeater Configuration:

Timer Board – This board is required so that the long timer can be programmed. With the absence
of this board, when a siding to mainline move is required, the lock will be released only when UC
codes are received from both directions.

Internal Series Overlay Board – If only the remote overlay input on the Switch Lock I/O Board is
used, then this board is not required. When this board is used, the Switch Lock Module will check
the remote overlay input and the internal series overlay board for track occupancy. In a mainline
to siding move, if either of these indicate occupancy, then the lock relay is energized without
running time.

The basic part number for the Switch Lock Module is 27359-017-XX with the desired
configuration called out by the group number. Table 6-2 lists the components available for the
Switch Lock Module without the repeating function.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-15 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 6-2. Switch Lock Module Components, without Repeater.

NAME GRS PART #

VPC 59473-872-01
REG/FLTR 59473-834-01
CPU 59473-831-01
SW LK I/O 59473-878-01
AUX I/O I 59473-837-01
AUX I/O II 59473-958-01
AUX I/O III 31166-043-01
OVERLAY 59473-877-01
TIMER 59473-879-01

SOFTWARE PROGRAM OPTIONS:

Switch Lock With Repeater Program Options

Option 1: Repeater Selection

1) SWITCH LOCK WITH SYNCHRONOUS REPEATER - This option includes the

synchronous repeater capability along with the switch lock functions.

2) SWITCH LOCK WITH ASYNCHRONOUS REPEATER - This option includes the

asynchronous repeater capability along with the switch lock functions.

3) SWITCH LOCK WITHOUT REPEATER - This option provides only the switch lock
functions.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-16 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 2: Lock Timing

* 1) TIMER BOARD- When timer board is installed, and a siding to mainline move occurs,
then the long timer can be programmed using the jumpers provided with the timer board.
The long timer is run when vital signal clearing codes are not received or an LC code is
present on either or both received directions. When the long timer expires then the lock
relay is energized.

2) NO TIMER BOARD- without a timer board, in a siding to mainline move, the lock relay
is energized only when unlock codes (UC) are received from both sides.

Option 3: Overlay

* 1) SERIES INTERNAL OVERLAY BOARD - When this board is present, the program
checks for occupancy near the lock by reading the status of this board. If the series
internal overlay or the remote overlay input shows occupancy and a mainline to siding
move is required, then the lock release relay is energized without running the long or short
timer.

2) NO INTERNAL OVERLAY BOARD - when this board is absent, the program checks
only the remote overlay input (which is on the Switch Lock I/O BOARD) for track
occupancy. When the remote overlay input shows occupancy and a mainline to siding
move is required, the lock release relay is energized without running the long or short
timer.

Option 4: Cab Signaling

1) Requires Auxiliary I/O Board, uses W CAB and E CAB outputs. Refer to Section 7 for
cab signaling specifications and description.

* 2) NO CAB SIGNALING

Option 5: Cab Signal Turn-On

* 1) Cab signal not used

2) Cab signal generator turned on with CODE 6 (tumble down) or NO CODE received

3) Cab signal turned on with selected vital code (specify code)

P2160A Vol. 1 6-17 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 6: CODE 1 Decoding

1) Requires Auxiliary I/O Board, uses W EXO and E EXO outputs. These outputs will be
energized whenever pulses that are received have width greater than 60msec.

* 2) No CODE 1 DECODING

Option 7: Pushbutton Latch Input

1) Requires Auxiliary I/O Board, uses W AUX+ and W AUX- isolated input terminals. This
input is used for Switch Lock mechanisms that have a pushbutton latch device, besides the
unlock request input. This input is used in a siding to mainline move. When the unlock
request is made and LC codes are being received from either direction, then activation of
this input will initiate the unlock sequence, run the short timer, and then energize the
unlock relay.

* 2) No PUSH BUTTON LATCH INPUT

*Note: The standard GRS Genrakode Switch Lock program includes:

a) Timer Board
b) Internal Overlay

Functions which require the use of an Auxiliary I/O Board are not included in this standard
program option. All software functions of this standard configuration are fully explained in this
section.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-18 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SOFTWARE PROGRAM WORKSHEETS

Switch Lock:

CUSTOMER:

LOCATION:

DATE:

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION:

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION:

WIRE WRAP ID CODE

(assigned by GRS) :

PROGRAMMED EPROM KIT

(assigned by GRS) :

PROGRAMMED EPROM(s)
(assigned by GRS) :

Use this worksheet in conjunction with Software Program Options

to select the options required for a Switch Lock Module.

Switch Lock With Repeater Program Options

Option 1: Repeater Selection (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: Switch lock with Synchronous Repeater
2: Switch lock with Asynchronous Repeater
3: Switch lock without Repeater

Option 2: Lock Timing (select 1 or 2)

1: With Timer Board
2: Without Timer Board

Option 3: Overlay (select 1 or 2)

1: Internal overlay
2: No internal overlay

P2160A Vol. 1 6-19 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Option 4: Cab Signaling (select 1 or 2)
1: Cab signal
2: No cab signal

Option 5: Cab Signal Turn On (select 1, 2 or 3)

1: Not applicable
2: CODE 6 or NO CODE
3: Specified code(s) (specify) _________

Option 6: Code 1 Decoding (select 1 or 2)

1: CODE 1 decoding
2: No CODE 1 decoding

Option 7: Pushbutton Latch Input (select 1 or 2)

1: Pushbutton input
2: No pushbutton input

Note: Options 4, 5, and 6 are only applicable for switch locks with repeater functions.

ORDERING INFORMATION – SWITCH LOCK MODULE

To order a Switch Lock Module, first select the desired hardware components by reviewing the
options that are available as listed above. Then fill in the Software Program Worksheet with the
selected software program options from above. Consult a GRS Sales Rep. for specific part
numbers and ordering details.

P2160A Vol. 1 6-20 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 7

CAB SIGNAL MODULE

MODULE DESCRIPTION

The Cab Signal Module is used in conjunction with the Control Point Module, Intermediate
Module, Repeater Module, or the Switch Lock Module to provide cab signaling to the rails. If an
aspect changes while the train is in a block, cab signaling allows the engineer to adjust the speed
of the train accordingly without waiting for the next wayside signal.

The module uses one Oscillator/Filter Board and one Driver Board. See Table 7-1. The module
contains a 5-ampere fuse for the low power used by the electronic components and a 15-ampere
fuse for the high power required to drive the cab signal.

Coded cab signal rates are supplied by the Genrakode track module using its vital power source;
however, the carrier frequency is generated internally on the Oscillator/Filter Board. The
transmitted signal is 100% modulation of a carrier frequency at the following rates:

RATE PULSE/MIN

constant 0.0
50 50.0
75 75.0
120 121.0
180 178.6
270 267.9
420 416.7

The signal is transformer coupled to the track to provide isolation from the battery. It then passes
through a series pass filter to convert the coupled square wave to a sinusoidal waveform and also
to reduce the loading of other equipment on the track. To prevent the cab signal from affecting
the track module, a parallel blocking filter is used between the track module inputs and the track
outputs.

There are four selectable power output taps available at the AAR posts, 100%, 80%, 50%, and
25% to allow adjustment for track circuit length and ballast condition. For the adjustment
procedure, see Section 10, Track Circuit Adjustment. The 100 Hz Cab Signal Module can supply
3 amperes into a .06 ohm shunt at 6,500 feet with 3 ohms/1000 feet of ballast resistance.

AAR terminal layout and circuit board assignments are shown in the module’s layout and
associated parts listing in Section 1 of Volume 2.

P2160A Vol. 1 7-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

TERMINAL DEFINITIONS

The Cab Signal Module has 12 AAR terminals arranged in two rows of six. See Figure 7-1. A
list of all terminals by function, followed by the terminal location in parentheses follows.

B (TB2-6) Positive terminal for primary battery power, nominally 12 volts.

N (TB1-6) Negative terminal for primary battery power.

VPC (TB2-4) Positive VPC voltage input from the Genrakode track module which
is used as the modulator power source.

CAB (TB2-5) Negative VPC voltage input from the Genrakode track module which
is modulated at the cab rate.

GKODE+ (TB2-2) Positive track input from the Genrakode track module.

GKODE- (TB2-3) Negative track input from the Genrakode track module.

TK+ (TB2-1) Positive output/input connection to track.

TK- (TB1-1) Negative output/input connection to track.

100% (TB1-2) Transformer output terminal to be jumpered to the TK- terminal for
100% cab signal output.

80% (TB1-3) Transformer output terminal to be jumpered to the TK- terminal for
80% cab signal output.

50% (TB1-4) Transformer output terminal to be jumpered to the TK- terminal for
50% cab signal output.

25% (TB1-5) Transformer output terminal to be jumpered to the TK- terminal for
25% cab signal output.

P2160A Vol. 1 7-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 TP1 TP2

TB2

TK + GKODE + GKODE - VPC CAB B

TB1

TK - 100% 80% 50% 25% N 15A 15A

CAB

Figure 7-1. Cab Signal Module AAR Terminals

HARDWARE COMPOSITION

The part number for the Cab Signal Module is 00331-021-01

Table 7-1. Cab Signal Module Hardware Composition.

NAME GRS PART NUMBER
Driver Board 59473-907-01
Oscillator Board 59473-906-01

P2160A Vol. 1 7-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

P2160A Vol. 1 7-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 8

HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

GENERAL MODULE DESCRIPTION

Refer to the pictorial at the front of Section 1 and the LED and Test Point locations pictorials at
the end of section 12 for the discussion that follows.

The five basic Genrakode Modules are packaged in similar configurations and use many common
mechanical parts between them. The mechanical package is very simple and has few parts.

Each module has keyhole slots on the back cover and bottom mounting flanges to allow easy
mounting to a backboard or shelf. All field wire connections are accessible at the top front of the
module via AAR posts which are identified by written function description and terminal location
number.

The majority of internal module and AAR post circuit connections consist of copper patterns on a
motherboard mounted vertically within the module. The motherboard has attached to it the AAR
posts for field wiring, the PC board edge connectors, fuses for module input power and
components forming the track filters.

A power switch, breaking the B side of the signal battery input, is wired to the motherboard and
mounted near the front of the module on the left side. This switch applies power to the module
fuses. Two modules fuses are used: one for the basic module power and the other for the
decoded output or lamp drive circuits.

PC boards are inserted into the module with alignment and support provided by an integral card
guide system which is also the structural support for the top and bottom of the module. A
perforated screen is mounted above the top card guide structure to preclude the dropping of
objects, such as AAR posts washers, down into the module.

The bottom of the module is open and raised slightly above the shelf mounting flanges to allow
the free flow of air into the PC board area and out of the top of the perforated screen. This
allows heat producing circuitry, such as track converters, lamp drivers, and lamp and decoded
output power converters to run at significantly lower operating temperatures, thus improving
reliability of the components and the system.

A clear plastic, slide-in-place, front cover is used in front of the PC boards. The clear plastic
cover allows viewing of the board edge mounted LED indicators on the PC boards. Over 50 such
LED indicators are present in a full module. These allow easy determination of system operating
status for various circuits.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The motherboard incorporates silkscreened nomenclature for all the AAR posts, PC board slot
positions and PC board names. All PC boards are silkscreened with circuit component
designators for easy identification of individual components. LED functional names are also
silkscreened on the PC boards.

Mounted to the motherboard are chokes, transformers, and capacitors which comprise the track
filters for the EAST and WEST track circuits. These filters provide 60 Hz rejection, plus isolation
to and from overlay equipment and motion detectors. All other electronic components are
mounted on the plug coupled printed circuit boards, including the lamp driver and decoded output
power converters, for easy replacement and repair.

All PC boards are mechanically keyed so that they cannot be plugged into the wrong board slot.

CIRCUIT BOARDS

Each circuit board available for Genrakode modules is described in the following pages. Each
board is identified by name, group number, circuit number, function(s) and modules it can be used
in. A circuit description is also provided.

Refer to Section 1 in Volume 2 for circuit diagrams, component parts layouts and parts lists for
these circuit boards.

Auxiliary I/O I Board 59473-837-01

PC Board: Auxiliary I/O I Board 59473-837-01

Circuit: 40185-600-00
Function: Provides additional vital input-output circuit
for a variety of operational options such as cab
signal control, switch controller, slide fence
detectors and power off detection.
Where Used: Control Point Module
Intermediate Module
Switch Lock Module
Repeater Module

Four vital output circuits, with similar operational characteristics and checking circuitry as the
decoded output board, are provided on the Auxiliary I/O I Board. See the Decode Output Board
for a description of these circuits. The four output circuits have an additional feature in that each
output has an LED indicator which is illuminated when the output is active.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The Auxiliary I/O I Board also has four vital DC input circuits. Two of these input circuits are
two-wire input circuits which can be operated from a local or remote power source. The other
two inputs are referenced to VPC common and must obtain their input energy from the +RLY
Common or +Lamp Common AAR terminal. The input circuits are similar in circuitry and
operational characteristics to the searchlight input circuits on the Searchlight Board. See the
Searchlight Board for the input circuit description. The four input circuits have LED indicators
which illuminate when the input circuit is active.

The Auxiliary I/O I Board also contains an ac power off detection circuit which can be connected
to 110 V ac power at intermediate location to provide for selectable approach lighting upon the
loss of ac power. Q9, Q10 and IC U1 provide the ac power detection. U1 is active or turned on
when ac power is present. The active signal passes through controlled buffer U21 under CPU
control and appears as an information bit on the CPU bus. If ac power detection is not used, but
the Auxiliary I/O Board is installed at intermediates, 12-V power must then be applied to input
terminals, and the system will respond as if power is permanently on.

IC U20 is an 8-bit latch controlled by the CPU. The outputs of the latch drive the four output
circuits and the four input drive circuits. IC U23 is a controlled buffer which checks the state of
the output latch and feeds the data back to the CPU bus in a "scrambled" fashion to produce
unique board identity and verification of correct latch operation. IC U22 is a 3-bit to 8-bit
decoder used to decode control signals to the Auxiliary I/O Board. IC U19 is an 8 bit controlled
buffer used to read the state of the four outputs and four input back to the CPU bus.

Auxiliary I/O II Board 59473-958-01

PC Board: Auxiliary I/O II Board 59473-958-01

Circuit: 40185-754-00
Function: Provides additional vital input-output circuit
for a variety of operational options such as cab
signal control, switch controller, slide fence
detectors, power off detection and double track
approach lighting.
Where Used: Intermediate Module

Two vital output circuits, with similar operational characteristics and checking circuitry as the
decoded output board, are provided on the Auxiliary I/O II Board. See the Decode Output Board
for a description of these circuits. The two output circuits have an additional feature in that each
output has an LED indicator which is illuminated when the output is active.
The Auxiliary I/O II Board also has four vital DC input circuits. Two of these input circuits are
two-wire input circuits which can be operated from a local or remote power source. The other
two inputs are referenced to VPC common and must obtain their input energy from the +Lamp
Common AAR terminal. The input circuits are similar in circuitry and operational characteristics
to the searchlight input circuits on the Searchlight Board. See the Searchlight Board for the input

P2160A Vol. 1 8-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

circuit description. The four input circuits have LED indicators which illuminate when the input
circuit is active.

The Auxiliary I/O II Board also contains an ac power off detection circuit which can be connected
to 110 V ac power at intermediate location to provide for selectable approach lighting upon the
loss of ac power. Q5, Q6 and IC U1 provide the ac power detection. U1 is active or turned on
when ac power is present. The active signal passes through controlled buffer U21 under CPU
control and appears as an information bit on the CPU bus. If ac power detection is not used, but
the Auxiliary I/O Board is installed at intermediates, 12-V power must then be applied to input
terminals, and the system will respond as if power is permanently on. The Auxiliary I/O Board
also contains two bi-directional I/O circuits used for double track approach lighting.

One circuit is for the EAST double track approach lighting (U10, U11) and the other for the
WEST double track approach lighting (U4, U5). IC U4 and U10 read the state of the I/O
terminal P1-57 and P1-45 respectively. This signal passes through controlled buffer U21 under
CPU control and appears as an information bit on the CPU bus. ICs U5 and U11 force the state
of the outputs to a low potential, which activates the same circuit in another unit and initiates the
approach lighting.

Auxiliary I/O III Board 31166-043-01

PC Board: Auxiliary I/O III Board 31166-043-01

Circuit: 24256-021-00
Function: Provides additional vital input-output circuit
for a variety of operational options such as cab
signal control, double track approach lighting,
and track indication.
Where Used: Control Point Module
Intermediate Module
Repeater Module
Switch Lock Module

The Auxiliary I/O III board allows additional features to be added to all of the various Genrakode
modules. These features include additional cab signal outputs (250Hz), additional relay drive
outputs for track indication (CODE 1), double approach lighting inputs for use at signal locations,
plus additional inputs and outputs.

The auxiliary I/O III board circuits can be divided into the following sections:

- 6 vital outputs
- 2 vital inputs
- 2 non-vital bi-directional inputs/outputs
- 1 non-vital power detect input

P2160A Vol. 1 8-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Each of the six vital output circuits include an optical isolator (U8, U6, U12, U16, U10, U14) and
an output transistor (Q6, Q4, Q10, Q14, Q8, Q12) to sink the output current to the VPC common
potential. All six outputs are identical, with three outputs referenced to the WEST VPC power
supply, and the other three outputs referenced to the EAST VPC power supply. Each output also
includes an output check transistor (Q5, Q3, Q9, Q13, Q7, Q11) and a feedback optical isolator
(U9, U7, U13, U17, U11, U15) to provide means for the CPU to check the states of the outputs.
The output buffer (U25) is used to place the output state data onto the data bus.

The two vital input circuits are read by the CPU on the same data bus line, and each are
controlled by an optical isolator (U5, U21). The CPU controls which input it wants to read by
enabling or disabling each input.

The two non-vital bi-directional input/output circuits are identical, with one referenced to the
EAST VPC and the other to the WEST VPC. These circuits are used for the Double Track
Approach (DTA) lighting feature available on the intermediate modules. These circuits are used
for inter-module communications, when one unit must inform a second of an approaching train.
The output function of each circuit is performed by an optical isolator (U2, U18) which sinks
current to VPC common. To act as an input circuit, the CPU turns the output off and then looks
for current flow from the VPC supply via and optical isolator (U4, U20). This current would be
present when the output pin is connected to the respective VPC common. The state of the inputs
are read by the CPU onto the data bus via buffers (U23 pin 3, U23 pin 8).

The non-vital POR (Power Out Relay) input is used by the intermediate module for detection of
the primary AC power for approach lighting purposes. The input voltage level is converted to a
digital signal for use by the CPU by optical isolator (U1). Buffer (U23 pin 11) is used to put the
input state onto the data bus.

The output drive latch (U26) is used to control the states of the outputs. The feedback buffer
(U30) returns to the CPU a scrambled version of the data from the drive latch. This scrambling
allows the CPU to identify the board by returning a unique number when data is circulated from
the drive latch to the buffer.

The AUX I/O III board is mechanically keyed differently than other Auxiliary I/O boards.
Therefore, the keying must be changed before this board can be installed. The plastic keys on the
motherboard connector must be set to positions 2 & 11.

The AUX/IO III board includes 10 LED’s to monitor the auxiliary inputs and outputs. The LED’s
and their function are as follows:

Inputs (two large LED’s set back from the edge of the board, starting from the top)

W AUX: On when the WEST Auxiliary input is energized.

E AUX: On when the EAST Auxiliary input is energized.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Outputs (8 small LED’s at the bottom of the front edge, starting at the top)

W CODE: On when the WEST CODE 1 relay drive is energized (Intermediate,

Repeater, Switch Lock only).

E CODE: On when the EAST CODE 1 relay drive is energized (Intermediate ,

Repeater, Switch Lock only).

WDTA: On when the WEST double track approach lighting output is

energized (Intermediate only).

EDTA: On when the EAST double track approach lighting output is

energized (Intermediate only).

WC250: Flashing when the WEST 250 Hz cab signal output is coding.

EC250: Flashing when the EAST 250 Hz cab signal output is coding.

EC100: Flashing when the EAST 100 Hz cab signal output is coding.

WC100: Flashing when the WEST 100 Hz cab signal output is coding.

Color Light Driver Board 59473-864-01

PC Board: Color Light Driver Board 59473-864-01

Circuit: 40185-599-00
Function: Provide lamp drive capability and filament checking for up to six lamps.
Where Used: Intermediate Module

Six identical circuits are provided on this board for driving six different lamps with power
requirements of up to 25 watts each. Operation of one circuit is discussed with the other five
operating in similar fashion. Lamp 1 output is a current sink output attached to the negative side
of Lamp 1. Lamp current flows from the lamp through CR4 and power MOSFET Q7 to Vital
Power Controller (VPC) Common when Q7 is turned on. Q7 can sink current for a signal bulb of
up to a 25 watts. Q7 is controlled by isolator U8, which is controlled by IC latch U7, which in
turn is controlled by the CPU. The state of Lamp 1 output is detected by Q2 and IC U11 and fed
back to the CPU through controlled buffer U4. Once every system cycle (2.8 seconds), outputs
are cycle-checked (turned on and off) by the CPU to determine that they are operable,
controllable and that the circuitry can be changed to both the on and off state. This data is fed
back to the CPU by U4. In between the 2.8 second period, the CPU periodically reads the state
of each output to determine that it is in the correct state. Data is "scrambled" on the CPU bus as
returned from U4 so that the CPU can uniquely identify the board it is "talking" to and that the
data is returned data, not transmitted data. This is done by assigning returned data bits to
different bus positions than transmitted data bits. R6 and C9 provide time delay integration to the
cycle test signals to filter out transient noise signals which could produce false cycle test data
results. The lamp drive output and output test circuit is similar to that on the Decode Output
Board but operates at higher current levels.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The lamp drive board also contains circuitry to perform filament checking for each lamp. For
Lamp 1, this circuitry consists of stages Q1, ICs U9 and U10. Once each system cycle (2.8
seconds) a lamp filament cycle check is performed. With lamp driver Q7 turned off momentarily,
the CPU turns isolator IC U10 on. This causes a low level current to flow through the lamp (if it
is intact) through CR4, R32, R30 and IC U10. Q1 senses the current flow through R32 and turns
on, which then feeds drive current to IC U9. The output of U9 is fed back to the digital logic and
CPU at C8. R2 and C8 filter out transient noise from the filament check signal. SU1 provides
transient protection for the Lamp 1 output. The lamp drive output circuits operate from the
isolated Vital Power Controller (VPC) DC voltage. This voltage is only present when the CPU
has determined that the module is operating properly.

IC U7 latch is controlled by the CPU and drives the individual lamp drive output circuits. Proper
IC U7 operation is determined by data read back to the CPU in a "scrambled" fashion by
controlled buffer U2. The data scrambling is done on the motherboard for the particular board
slot, allowing the same board to be used in two locations, but with a unique identity for the EAST
and WEST directions. IC U6 is used as a 3 to 8 line decoder for on-the-board control signals. IC
U3 is an 8 bit latch controlling the drive signals to the filament test circuits. IC U1 checks the
operation of this latch and feeds the data back to the CPU. IC U4 and U5 are controlled buffers
which read the state of the output check circuits and filament check circuit and return this data to
the CPU.

Converter/Receiver Board 59473-833-01

PC Board: Converter/Receiver Board 59473-833-01

Circuit: 40185-592-00
Function: Converter portion creates isolated DC pulses for transmission on the rails.
Receiver portion provides an isolated pulse detection circuit for pulse codes
received on the rails.
Where Used: Control Point Module
Intermediate Module
Switch Lock Module
Repeater Module
Test Unit Module

The converter is essentially a transformer-isolated, DC to DC converter which converts the 12-V

signal-battery supply to a track battery voltage level for transmitting. Four nominal track voltage
levels are selectable by screw switches on taps of output transformer T2. Nominal track voltage
levels available are 1.5, 2.0, 3.0 and 4.0 volts dc. The converter operates at a relatively high
frequency above the audio range. This allows for quiet operation and the use of small
transformers.

Q13 and Q14 are power MOSFETS which drive the output transformer. The MOSFET gate
drive signals are controlled by IC U13 and oscillator U14, which is gated to U13 by isolator U12.
The CPU Board generates the actual code pulses to be transmitted and turns the converter on and

P2160A Vol. 1 8-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

off via transistor Q15 and isolators U11 and U12. DC vital energy from the Vital Power
Controller (VPC) Board is applied to U11 and U12 also. This provides a method for a vital
disconnect switch between the CPU code pulses and the converter control circuit. VPC energy
must be present in order for CPU code pulses to be transmitted to the rails. VPC energy is
present only when the module is operating in a safe manner.

The receiver comprises several functional circuit sections:

1. Disconnect Switch and Receive Current Adjustment

2. Current Sensor
3. Low Pass Filter
4. 60 Hz Filter
5. Offset Null Adjust Circuit
6. Level Detector
7. Receiver Test Circuit

Each circuit is discussed in turn.

Q1 and Q16 are inverse-connected power MOSFETS which connect or disconnect the receiver
from the rails for receiving or transmitting. R1, R2 and R78 are screw-switch selected resistors
which allow the receiver resistance, and thus the current level, to be adjusted. The receiver
resistance can be set to 0.27, 0.56, 0.83, 1.09, 1.38, or 1.65 ohms. The module wiring resistance
adds approximately 0.36 ohms to the selected adjustable resistance value. Because Q1 and Q16
receiver switches are connected to the track leads, they must be gate controlled by an isolated
voltage source. T1, Q11 and Q12 comprise a self-oscillating DC to DC converter controlled by
Q10, U10 and the CPU. When the receiver is to be connected to the rails, the CPU turns U10,
Q10 and the DC to DC converter on, which turns Q1 and Q16 on.

MT1 is the current sensor which detects the received current level. The current sensor device is
placed within an air-gap slot in a ferrite toroid. A heavy wire coil in series with the track current
is wound through the aperture of the toroid. The current sensor produces an output proportional
to the magnetic field in the air gap which is proportional to current flowing in the track winding.
A second coil (tapped) winding is used to provide a cycle test of the operation of the receiver
under CPU control.

The output of MT1 pin 2 is connected to the first op-amp stage of U1, which is a low-pass filter
with a cutoff frequency of 10 Hz. The output of the low-pass filter is connected to the second
stage of U1, which is a 60 Hz notch filter that removes any remaining 60 Hz levels. IC U16 is an
8-V regulator which is used to power the current sensor, op-amps, and level detectors. This
makes the receiver insensitive to load voltage variations on the signal battery. The third stage of
U1 pin 8 provides a 4-V reference from a voltage divider, R34 and R35, on the 8-V supply. The
4 volts is the reference voltage for the op-amps.

The 60 Hz notch filter output, U1 pin 7, is applied to the offset null adjust circuit at Q17 and to
the output summing op-amp through R72. Op-amp U2 is an inverting sample-and-hold circuit

P2160A Vol. 1 8-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

which stores the offset voltage from MT1 and applies it inverted to output summing op-amp U1
through R26. The fourth stage of IC U1 is the output summing op-amp which amplifies the
received signal and subtracts the offset voltage of the current sensor to produce an output
voltage, with respect to the 4-V reference, which reflects the track current. Resistor R16 is
selected in factory test to adjust the overall gain of the receiver circuit. Q4-Q5,and Q7-Q8 are
complementary level detector circuits which switch at prescribed receive current levels. The level
detector outputs are fed to the CPU which analyzes the received and test signals.

The CPU performs a cycle test of the receiver once every system cycle (2.8 seconds) to insure
that the receiver is operating correctly and that its gain has not changed. This is done by injecting
fixed-current tie-levels in test windings on the current sensor and observing the correct response
of the level detector outputs by the CPU. Q2 and Q3 are controlled by the CPU to conduct
discrete test-current levels in a tapped test winding on the current sensor. Q2 is "on" for a test
current level which is above the threshold of both level detectors. Q2 and Q3 are "on" for a test-
current level which is below the threshold of both level detectors.

The sequence of events is as follows: Once every 2.8 seconds, coincident with the first
transmitted pulse, the receiver is disconnected from the rails by Q1 and Q16. Q2 turns on for 50
ms, allowing an upper level test-current to flow in the test winding. At 50 ms, the CPU "looks" to
see that the level detectors are in their proper state. For an additional 50 ms, Q2 and Q3 are both
turned on, allowing a lower level test current to flow. At 100 ms, the CPU again checks the state
of both level detectors to see that they are in their proper state (both should have changed states).
The CPU then turns Q2 and Q3 off but maintains the receiver disconnected from the track for an
additional 50 ms. During this time period, the offset null adjust circuit is sampling the DC output
of the current sensor. At 150 ms, the offset null circuit reverts to a hold mode, and the receiver is
reconnected to the rails. The offset null circuit then holds the current sensor offset voltage for the
remainder of the 2.8 second cycle. IC U7 is an 8-bit latch used to control the various functions on
the receiver. IC U9 is a controlled buffer used to decode board select commands and to interface
the level detector outputs onto the CPU data bus. U7 and U8 controlled buffers provide a
method for the CPU to uniquely identify that the CPU is "talking" to the Converter/Receiver
Board and that the board is controllable. The CPU data bus is sent to the boards on pins 18-25
and returned to the motherboard on pins 29-36. The returned data is "scrambled" on the
motherboard to provide a unique signature to each Converter/Receiver Board because two such
boards are used in the system.

Three LEDs are provided on the board. The top LED flashes coincident with each transmitted
pulse. The middle LED is the receiver LED and flashes coincident with each received pulse above
the receive threshold level and with the upper level test current pulse. The bottom LED is the test
current LED and flashes coincident with receiver test current pulses.

Three test posts lugs are placed at the front edge of the board. The top post is the amplified
receive and test current voltage levels that are applied to the input of the level detectors. This
voltage may be viewed with reference to the +4-V reference (middle test lug) or 12-V Common
(lower test lug).

P2160A Vol. 1 8-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Converter/Receiver Board 59473-833-02

PC Board: Converter/Receiver Board 59473-833-02

Circuit: 24256-466-00
Function: Converter portion creates isolated DC pulses for transmission on line wires.
Receiver portion provides an isolated pulse detection circuit for pulse codes
received on line wires.
Where Used: Control Point Module
Intermediate Module
Switch Lock Module
Repeater Module

The converter for the 59473-833-02 board is essentially the same as the 59473-833-01 board.
The only differance is a new output transformer T2 with different output voltages, 4.0, 5.0, 6.5,
8.0 volts DC.

The receiver section is also essentially the same as the Gr. 1 board except for three changes: VR4,
MT1, and (R1, R2, R78). The change to MT1 increases the sensetivity of the receiver from 0.5 A
to 0.25 A. VR4 and the resistors accomodate the increase to the converter output voltage. These
two changes allow the Line Driver Converter/Receiver board to communicate over great
distances, see specification section for details.

WARNING

This board is only intended to be used for line wire applications and must
not be used in applications for normal track operation. Usage may result in
an unfavorable excess track current in the receiver board, causing the
inability to detect trains in the track circuit.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Central Processing Unit Board 59473-831-01

PC Board: Central Processing Unit Board 59473-831-01

Circuit: 40185-572-00
Function: Controls overall Genrakode operation in each module. Performs safety checks;
contains diagnostics, status indicators (see desired module for LED layout),
and Code 5 selection switches.
Where Used: Control Point Module
Intermediate Module
Repeater Module
Switch Lock Module
Test Unit (Gr. 2)

IC U10 is an 8032 8-bit micro controller (CPU) containing three 8-bit ports, three 8-bit timer-
counters, and 256 bytes of RAM. ICs U11 and U12 are 27128 type, 8 by 16K byte EPROMs
which contain the program for operating each type of module. Some modules require one
EPROM and other modules require two EPROMs. IC U17 is used as the EPROM address latch
controlled by CPU port 0. Quad NAND gate IC U16 is used to generate the EPROM chip enable
signals from the ALE and A14 signals from the CPU. IC U8 is a 374 Quad latch used to latch
information out of CPU port 0. The latch outputs are used to control the Vital Power
Controller’s (VPC) transmit converters and, through further decoding (3 to 8-bit) in IC U15,
provide various board select signals. The output of U8 latch is also fed back to the CPU port 0
bus through IC U9. The data returns to the CPU in a scrambled manner such that the returned
data pattern is specific but different from that sent to the output port. This allows the output port
to be tested by the CPU in a manner which can be deemed to indicate correct operation of the
hardware.

Two crystal oscillator circuits are contained on the CPU Board. One operates the internal CPU
clock at 12 MHz. The second is an external oscillator operating at 3.2 MHz. Two circuits are
used to provide diversity to the safety-critical item of system timing. The CPU checks itself
against the 3.2 MHz oscillator. Any divergence between the two oscillators by more than +0.2%
will result in system shutdown and restart.

A hardware reset circuit on the CPU board automatically initiates a reset of the CPU upon power
up or a program halt condition. The hardware reset causes the CPU to reinitialize and begin a 10
second delay before system operation begins again. Four inverter stages of IC U20 are used for
the hardware reset circuit. It is also possible to initiate a reset by depressing a momentary push-
button at the front edge of the CPU board. IC U13 develops a hardware reset hold-off signal
under CPU control when the system is operating properly.

The CPU Board also contains Code 5 switches for EAST and WEST to allow for initiating or
repeating Code 5 through the location. IC U18 is a controlled buffer used to read the position of
the Code 5 switches and place the data on the CPU bus.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The CPU Board includes a hardware circuit to insure that the correct version of software is
installed in the CPU Board for the particular module location. Eight wire-wrap pins are used to
encode one of 256 combinations for a signature of the particular location on the rear of the
motherboard. IC U7 reads the encoded wire wrap positions and, through CPU control, places the
data on the CPU data bus. The CPU will only attempt to run the resident EPROM program if the
signature read from the motherboard matches the EPROM data.

The CPU has 40 LED indicators along its front edge which indicate codes selected and decoded,
light out indication, stick status, track detection status, and power off status. These same LEDs
are used with redefined functions when in the diagnostic mode.
IC U1 is a controlled buffer which outputs CPU data to 5 LED output latches/LED drivers U2,
U3, U4, U5 and U6. U19 develops the LED output latch enable signal.

Switch SW1 is a three position toggle switch accessible at the front edge of the CPU. It controls
the LED indicators on the CPU. The center position turns all LEDs off. A test position turns all
LEDs on for LED test, and the third position is the normal operating position. The toggle switch
and push-button are also used to access the diagnostics. See Section 12, TROUBLESHOOTING
AND DIAGNOSTICS for more information.

DC Code Select Input Board 59473-895-01

PC Board: Code Select Input Board 59473-895-01

Circuit: 40185-568-00
Function: Interface between VPI circuitry at head blocks which selects codes to be
transmitted by Genrakode. Operates on circuit contact closures.
Where Used: Control Point Modules

The DC Code Select Input Board contains 16 vital input circuits (eight for the EAST, and eight
for the WEST direction) by which codes 1 through 8 can be selected for transmission from the
location. Code 1 must be selected to enable transmission of any of the signal clearing codes. No
more than three codes may be selected at one time, such as code 1, code 5 and code 4. Two
signal clearing codes selected simultaneously will inhibit any code transmission.

The DC code select board is capable of detecting DC inputs when interrogated by the CPU board.
The board is divided into the WEST and EAST sections and thus it has separate digital and
analog circuitry for each side. The WEST and EAST sections of the board have different
scrambling circuitry. This allows the CPU to determine the EAST from the WEST. The DC
inputs are generated by other external controlling elements (outside the control point module).
The following signals are brought to the AAR posts for the EAST: EREF (which is the common
for all EAST inputs), ECNT1, ECNT2, ECNT3, ECNT4, ECNT5, ECNT6, ECNT7, ECNT8.
For the WEST: WREF (which is the common for all WEST inputs), WCNT1, WCNT2,
WCNT3, WCNT4, WCNT5, WCNT6, WCNT7, WCNT8. To determine whether an input is
present, the CPU attempts to circulate data through each opto-isolator circuit. If it is capable to
read back a series of ones and zeros, then it determines that the input is present.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Since all inputs (for one side) are read back through a common single bit buffer, data can only be
circulated through one input circuit at a time. The single bit read back buffer contains an
integrator (filter) to reduce noise. The input circuitry is totally isolated from the digital side via
the opto-isolators. The CPU communicates to the board through data latch ICs U24 and U25 and
initiates control signals through IC U20 and U23. Integrated circuits U21 and U22 are used as
bus driver buffers through which the CPU ascertains that it can address or "talk" to the correct PC
board at the correct time.

LED indicators are provided on the CPU board to indicate which of the 16 input circuits are
selected.

Decode/Output Board 59473-838-01

PC Board: Decode/Output Board 59473-838-01

Circuit: 40185-566-00
Function: Output drivers for signals received and decoded at Control Point Modules.
Where Used: Control Point Module

The Decode Output Board contains eight identical circuits which are used to drive external relays
in response to decoded receive codes. Two boards are used in each module to provide both
EAST and WEST outputs. Each output is a current sinking (or active low state) output capable
of driving relay coils of 200 ohms to 1800 ohms. Each output has surge protection provided by a
10-ohm resistor and a 27-volt surge zener diode.

IC17 is an 8-bit latch which stores the output data from the CPU and controls the state of each
output. IC19 is an 8 bit controlled buffer which reads the state of the outputs and feeds back to
the CPU each output state. Five-volt logic circuitry is completely isolated from the 12-V output
circuitry. Energy for the output circuits is derived from the Vital Power Controller (VPC ) PC
board which will only generate an output voltage level when the Genrakode system is operating
safely. A separate checking circuit is provided for each output so that the CPU can determine
that each particular output is in its correct state and that each output is controllable. If the CPU
finds that an output has failed, power to the outputs is removed via the VPC board.

For a Code 1 Relay output, the checking circuit is composed of Q7, IC7 and associated
components. R15 and C10 comprise an integrator circuit to filter off radio frequency interference
(RFI) and transients from the checking circuits.

Each output state is rechecked every 8-16 ms and each output is toggled on and off once each
system cycle (2.8 seconds) to determine that the CPU has control of the output.

LED indicators on the CPU board indicate which decoded outputs are active.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-13 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Driver Board 59473-907-01

PC Board: Driver 59473-907-01

Circuit: 40185-644-00
Function: Cab Signal Driver and 12-V High Power Filter
Where Used: Cab Signal Module

The Driver Board contains a cab rate modulator, signal divider, power drive section and a 12-V
high power filter. The cab rate modulator is a fail-safe control of the input frequency. It is isolated
from the rest of the circuitry by optic isolators U1, U2 and U3 which operate from a vital power
source generated in the Genrakode track module. The signal divider is a flip-flop which divides
the input frequency by two. This is to insure that the output frequency duty cycle remains at 50
percent with voltage variations. The power drive section uses two dual FET drive circuits to
handle the current levels required. There are two LEDs located at the edge of this board. CR1
indicates that power is being supplied to the drive transformer. CR4 indicates that the schmitt
trigger is holding the outputs disabled.

The filter section provides filtering and surge protection for the 12-V high power used for the
track circuit. Components L1, SU1, and C7 provide this function. The input power to the filter
comes from the module AAR B and N posts through the ON-OFF switch and the 15 ampere fuse.

High Power Vital Power Controller (VPC) 59473-872-01

PC Board: High Power Vital Power Controller (VPC) 59473-872-01

Circuit: 40185-616-00
Function: Provides a positive, vital, disconnect of power
from signal lamp drive, searchlight mechanisms,
and vital outputs in the event of failed output
circuits or improper module operation. Also is
a positive disconnect for transmitted pulses.
Where Used: Intermediate Module
Switch Lock Module

The High Power VPC Board produces an isolated DC voltage source regulated to 12.5 volts at
the board, for use as lamp drive and searchlight mechanism outputs. The output voltage is
regulated for both input voltage and lamp load current changes. Thus, signal lamps can be
operated at a constant lamp voltage; this increases life and decreases signal maintenance. An
external resistor is required to set the desired voltage across the lamp to 10 volts.

The output voltage is only present when the CPU has determined that the module hardware and
software is operating properly. The CPU drives a tuned circuit and produces a DC voltage on C3
and a negative DC voltage on C5 for use by IC U2 and U5, respectively, when the module is
operating properly. The operation of this portion of the circuit is similar to the Low Power VPC
Board (see the Low Power VPC Board description).

P2160A Vol. 1 8-14 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

IC U2 is a current-mode, switching power supply controller used to drive, in a push pull manner,
power MOSFETs Q13, Q14, Q15 and Q16. These power FETs drive transformer T2 whose
secondary voltage is rectified by CR1 and CR2, filtered by L2 and C14, and produces 12.5 V DC
at the board output terminals. IC U5 forms an oscillator circuit which drives U2 at its basic
operating frequency of 70 KHz. Output voltage regulation is performed by peak current limiting
the pulse by pulse current in the power MOSFETS. Duty cycle of the T2 primary pulses varies
directly with input voltage variation. Current-sense transformer T3 measures the current peaks
flowing in the power MOSFETS and feeds back this signal to U2 pin 4 (+ current sense). This
current-sense signal is compared to the regulator set-point voltage from the error amplifier output
at pin 7. Output voltage is controlled by IC U4 on the secondary of T2. U4 compares a portion
of the output voltage level at pin 11 to an internal 1.5 V reference at pins 9 and 10. An error
signal is developed at pin 12 (EAMP) by an internal op-amp operating with open-loop DC gain.
This error signal is applied to isolator U3’s photo diode, which is then optically coupled to the
isolator transistor. The isolator provides voltage isolation to the error signal fed back to switching
regulator U2. The error signal is applied to R30 input resistor of the error op-amp in U2
switching regulator which then readjusts the set point of the current sense circuit and adjusts the
input current to match the output voltage requirements. L1, C15 and SU1 provide input power
filtering and transient suppression for this board. Power input comes from the 30- ampere fuse
mounted on the module motherboard. R19, R23 and C12 provide a soft start and current limit
circuit for the converter. Output transient protection is provided by SU2.

Low Power Vital Power Controller (VPC) 59473-835-01

PC Board: Low Power Vital Power Controller (VPC) 59473-835-01

Circuit: 40185-593-00
Function: Provides a positive, vital disconnect of power from decoded output circuits in
the event of failed output circuits or improper module operation. Also is a
positive disconnect for transmitted pulses.
Where Used: Control Point Module
Repeater Module

The VPC Board produces an isolated, nominal 12 V DC voltage source for use by decoded
output circuits. The output voltage is only present when the CPU has determined that the module
hardware and software is operating properly.

When the CPU has determined the system is operating properly, it sends periods of a 10 KHz
square wave to transistor Q1’s base. This 10 KHz signal is passed through isolator U1 and
applied to driver transistors Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5. This amplified square wave voltage is applied to
a 10 KHz series turned circuit composed of C2 and T1. Two secondary windings on T1
effectively respond to the frequency of the T1 input signal.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-15 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

A DC voltage is developed across C7 if the CPU is providing a 10 KHz signal. No voltage or a
much lower voltage exists for no frequency or other frequencies. The DC voltage on C7 is used as
the power source for IC U3 and circuit Q6, Q7, Q8. The base-emitter junction voltage of Q6 is
used as a threshold level detection of the secondary voltage level of T1. This is a more precise
threshold level detection than C7 can provide. When the secondary voltage level of T1 is high
enough to allow Q6, Q7 and Q8 to switch at the 10 KHz frequency and C7 has a detected DC
level, a negative DC voltage (relative to 12 V Common) is developed across C9. The power
source for IC U2 is from this negative voltage on C9. Therefore, proper module and CPU
operation produces a positive voltage on C7 for IC U3 and a negative voltage on C9 for IC U2.
Improper or failed module or CPU operation will produce no voltages. C9 voltage has the more
precise threshold detection.

IC U3 is a power driver which has suitable output driving circuits for power MOSFETS Q9 and
Q10. U3, Q9, Q10, T2 and associated components form a driven DC to DC power converter for
producing the isolated vital output voltage for decoded output circuits. IC U2 forms an oscillator
which clocks IC U3 to produce push-pull type output signals to Q9 and Q10. The output of U2 is
a short pulse which switches U3 from one MOSFET to the second. The width of the short pulse
provides a dead time region wherein both MOSFETS are turned off to prevent simultaneous
conduction during the switching interval. To produce a DC output, Q9 and Q10 must be driven
by IC U2 and U3. U2 and U3 can only operate when the DC power sources are present from C9
and C7. These DC sources are only present when the CPU is operating properly and producing a
10 KHz input signal. Thus the circuit provides a vital disconnect means for a driven DC to DC
converter.

The +12-V power for this board comes from the second 5-A fuse in the module. Filtering and
surge protection are provided on the board by L1, SU1, C3 and C4. The isolated output of the
board is filtered and surge protected by C5, C6 and SU2.

Oscillator/Filter Board 59473-906-01

PC Board: Oscillator/Filter 59473-906-01

Circuit: 40185-629-00
Function: 200 Hz Oscillator and 12-V Battery Low Power Filter
Where Used: Cab Signal Module

The Oscillator/Filter Board contains a fail safe Hartley oscillator which supplies the Driver Board
with a 200 Hz square wave used for cab carrier generation. The tank circuit, containing
components C2 and L2, sets the oscillation frequency which has proven to be very stable even
with voltage variations present.

The filter section provides filtering and surge protection for the 12-V low power used by all of the
boards. Components L1, SU1 and C1 provide this function. Input power to the filter comes from
the module AAR B and N posts through the ON-OFF switch and the 5-ampere fuse.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-16 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Regulator/Filter Board 59473-834-01

PC Board: Regulator/Filter 59473-834-01

Circuit: 40185-565-00
Function: 12-V Battery Supply Filter and 5-V Regulator for IC Logic
Where Used: Control Point Module
Intermediate Module
Repeater Module
Switch Lock Module
Test Unit

The Regulator/Filter Board contains filtering and surge protection from the 12-V signal battery
for all the PC boards within the module (except the VPC boards which have their own filtering
and surge protection). Components L3, SU1, C12, L1, and C1 provide the filtering and surge
protection. The Regulator/Filter Board also has a 5-V regulator for operating the digital logic
portions of the system. The regulator is a flyback type switching regulator consisting of switching
control IC1 and associated components. T1 is the flyback transformer which produces an isolated
5-volt potential at its secondary. The 5-V logic supply voltage is completely isolated from the 12-
V signal-battery and all other input/output circuits of Genrakode. This provides isolation of the
5-V logic from noise on the 12-V supply and I/O lines. IC3 samples the 5-V output voltage and
provides a feedback signal through opto-isolator IC2 to switching regulator IC1.

The 5-V regulator, IC1, also has a low battery detection circuitry which will automatically shut
down the 5-V supply at approximately 7.5 to 8 volts signal-battery voltage. This prevents the
system from attempting to operate when the input voltage is too low for proper operation and
virtually removes all Genrakode module loading from an already discharged signal battery. The
input power to the filter boards comes from the module AAR B and N posts through the ON-OFF
switch and the 5-A fuse.

Relay Code Select Input Board 59473-830-01

PC Board: Relay Code Select Input Board 59473-830-01

Circuit: 40185-568-00
Function: Interface between relay circuitry at head blocks which selects codes to be
transmitted by Genrakode. Operates on relay contact closures.
Where Used: Control Point Modules
Test Unit

The Relay Code Select Input Board contains 16 vital input circuits (eight for the EAST, and eight
for the WEST direction) by which codes 1 through 8 can be selected for transmission from the
location.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-17 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

A code reference common AAR terminal (for each direction) (connector pin 35 for EAST; 70 for
WEST on the PC board) supplies energy to an external relay selection network which selects the
desired codes to be transmitted. Code 1 must be selected to enable transmission of any of the
signal clearing codes. No more than three codes may be selected at one time, such as code 1,
code 5 and code 4. Two signal clearing codes selected simultaneously will inhibit any code
transmission. The CPU "cycle checks" the code select board in such a manner that it can
determine that only those codes which are indeed selected by the external relay circuitry are read
as selected by the CPU.

All circuitry which interfaces with the external relay logic is isolated with optical isolators and
operates from the 12-V signal-battery. The external relay contact current level is approximately
12 mA with one code selected. The signals presented to the relay contacts (for reading selected
codes) are dynamic signals with relatively long pulse widths of approximately 28 ms. This long
pulse width allows for integration of the returned signal on the code reference terminal to
maximize elimination of transient noise effects on the code selection circuits. The R40-C10
combination is an example of the noise integration circuit on the EAST REF. logic. The CPU
communicates to the board through data latch ICs U24 and U25 and initiates control signals
through IC U20 and U23. Integrated circuits U21 and U22 are used as bus driver buffers through
which the CPU ascertains that it can address or "talk" to the correct PC board at the correct time.

LED indicators are provided on the CPU board to indicate which of the 16 input circuits are
selected.

Series Overlay Board 59473-877-01

PC Board: Series Overlay Board 59473-877-01

Circuit: 40185-615-00
Function: Detects the presence of the train in the vicinity of switchlock on the mainline
(frequency = 13.8 Khz).
Where used: Switch Lock Module

This board detects the presence of the train in the vicinity of the switch. The board contains
scrambling circuitry so that the board can be uniquely identified; this is done with ICs U24 and
U25.

The board contains a 13.8 Khz transmitter and receiver combination. The transmitter generates
the 13.8 Khz and drives a parallel tuned transformer (T1). The output of this tuned transformer is
coupled to the transformer (T2) on the receiving side via a series tuned circuit (L1, C1) and the
presence of the train. When the signal is received at the other side and has enough amplitude, it
will trigger a threshold detector whose output is sensed by the CPU. There is also an LED (CR1)
on the board to indicate when the overlay circuitry has detected the presence of the train.

Three screw-on taps on the board compensate for the inductance of different lead lengths used;
refer to Section 10 (TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT) for adjustment procedures.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-18 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Searchlight Driver Board 59473-863-01

PC Board: Searchlight Driver Board 59473-863-01

Circuit: 40185-596-00
Function: Filament drive and check; mechanism drive; position check for 2 searchlight
mechanisms.
Where Used: Intermediate Module

The Searchlight Board contains all the circuitry to control two searchlight mechanisms. Lamp
filament drive and filament checking circuitry has the same configuration and operation as on the
color light drive board. See the Color Light Drive Board for a description of lamp drive
operation.

Components Q5, Q7, Q9, Q10, Q13, Q14, IC U15 and U16 comprise the bipolar drive circuit for
the A mechanism. The output drive for a red aspect has the ASL and -ASL leads at VPC
Common energy. ICs U15 and U16 are both turned on by the CPU causing Q5 - Q7 and Q10 -
Q14 to conduct and thereby hold the ASL and -ASL leads at VPC Common. To drive the
mechanism to the yellow position, IC U16 is turned off by the CPU and U15 is on. Q13 is then
conducting, producing +VPC voltage at the ASL output; and Q5, Q7 are conducting and thereby
producing VPC Common at the -ASL output. To drive the mechanism to the green position, IC
U15 is turned off by the CPU and U16 is turned on. Q9 is then conducting and thereby producing
+VPC voltage at the - ASL output, and Q10 and Q14 are conducting and thereby producing VPC
Common at the ASL output. VR7, VR8, VR9, VR10, R90, and R92 are used to provide
transient protection to the output drivers for the A mechanism.

Six vital input circuits are provided, 3 for each mechanism, to read the mechanism position
contacts. ICs U23, U24 and associated components comprise the input circuit for the RED
position of the A mechanism. Positive signal battery voltage is applied to the red mechanism
contact and returns to the A-RG input. Direct current (dc) flows though R85, R80 and either
U23 or CR16 and U24. R85, VR6 and C10 provide transient protection and noise filtering for
the input circuit. The CPU periodically turns IC U23 on and off and thereby shunts input current
to or from U24 only if the DC input signal is present. U24 output thus follows the switching
sequence of U23 only if the DC input signal is present. The CPU then detects the presence of
data sent through U23 and U24 only if the DC input is present and thereby indicates a positive
contact closure of the red position of the mechanism. The data is sent back to the CPU bus
through controlled buffer U26.

IC U32 is an 8 bit latch used to control the mechanism drives, filament drives and filament check
drives. IC U29 is used to check the correct operation of the latch and proper board addressing
identity by feeding "scrambled" data back to the CPU bus in a similar manner as the color light
board. IC U31 latch is used to drive the mechanism input check circuits. U31 is checked by
controlled buffer U27 with data feedback to the CPU bus.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-19 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Switch Lock I/O Board 59473-878-01

PC Board: Switch Lock I/O Board 59473-878-01

Circuit: 40185-611-00
Function: Contains circuitry to read switch lock inputs, outputs to drive three relays and
one lamp output. Also this board contains jumpers for selecting unlock codes
for EAST and WEST.
Where used: Switch Lock Module

The Switch Lock I/O Board contains inputs and outputs to directly connect to electric lock
mechanisms. Both inputs and outputs are isolated from the digital circuitry via opto isolators.
Three inputs are used to bring the following into the Switch Lock Module: unlock request,
remote overlay and NWP.

The unlock request input is referenced to 12-V signal common. Applying +12-V to this input
indicates to the system of the request. LED CR11 is turned on when 12 V is applied to the
Unlock Request input.

The remote overlay input is used to sense track occupancy on the mainline; this input is isolated,
and absence of energy indicates occupancy. When the remote overlay input is not going to be
used, it should be connected to the signal-battery terminals. When the remote overlay input is
energized, the LED labeled CR14 is turned on.

The NWP input is tied to the switch controller; the Switch Lock Module expects this input to be
energized when the switch is in correspondence. The NWP input is also isolated. LED CR13 is
on when energy is applied. The CPU detects energy on one of these inputs when it is able to
circulate data "through" that particular input.

The Switch Lock I/O Board contains three outputs used to drive relays with coil resistance of 50
ohms or more and 1 output used to drive a lamp of 25 watts. The three relay outputs are used to
drive the lock relay coil, the remote overlay output and code 1 relay (optional). The outputs have
state check circuitry, so their corresponding states can be checked. Every 8 ms the CPU verifies
that the outputs are in the correct states, and every system cycle the outputs are toggled to make
sure they are not stuck high or low. The LEDs labeled LR, OL, OT and LP correspond to LOCK
RELAY, OVERLAY RELAY, OUTPUT RELAY and LAMP OUTPUT respectively.

The CPU is guaranteed to communicate to the switch lock I/O circuitry via ICs U24 and U25.
These employ scrambling which is unique to these I/O functions. The other section of the Switch
Lock I/O Board contains jumpers to select unlock codes (UC) and lock codes (LC) for WEST
and EAST directions.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-20 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

A jumper is required for each direction to select UC and LC codes. The jumper to select the
unlock codes can be located in one of five locations labeled on the board as A,B,C,D, and E:

Jumper Setting Unlock Codes Selected

A 8,2,3,4 or 7
B 2,3,4 or 7
C 3,4 or 7
D 4, or 7
E 7

LEDS on the board are controlled by the CPU to indicate the type of code that has been received
from the rails when compared to the jumper setting. These LEDs are labeled on the board as WA,
WB, EA, EB; and they are fully explained in Section 6. Also, this board has an LED labeled ST.
This ST is flashed when the short timer is running, and it remains on when the short timer times
out.

To make sure that the correct codes are being selected for both EAST and WEST, the board has
unique scrambling for each side. IC pairs U16 and U17 are used to identify the jumper for UC
selection for the WEST, and IC pairs U18 and U19 are used for the EAST.

Timer Board 59473-879-01

PC Board: Timer Board 59473-879-01

Circuit: 40185-617-00
Function: Contains four double columns of jumpers so vital time delay can be
programmed.
Where used: Switch Lock Module

The Timer Board is used to program timing delays from 0 seconds to 99 minutes and 99 seconds.
The time delay is setup at the time of installation and is done by inserting four jumpers, one in
each double column. There must always be four jumpers installed when this board is used. The
board contains two latches and two buffers which are used to drive/read the columns and rows.

The CPU board determines what the time delay is by enabling each row individually and then
checks to see which column is active. The data that is read back is scrambled so that the CPU can
verify that it is communicating with the correct board; other checks are executed to insure the
integrity of the board. Refer to Section 6 to see how the timing delay is used in the Switch Lock
Module.

P2160A Vol. 1 8-21 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

P2160A Vol. 1 8-22 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 9

INSTALLATION

GENERAL RULES

The Genrakode Modules may be either shelf or wall mounted. For dimensions, see Appendix A
on Genrakode specifications. Several basic rules must be heeded if the system is to operate
properly.

The Genrakode modules operate on input power ranging from 9 to 16 volts. The standard power
source is a 12.0-volt signal battery. Battery connections to the module should be made with
AWG #10 or larger wire. Output connections from the modules to signal lights should be made
with at least AWG #10 wire. The output voltage to the signal lights is 12.0 +0.3 volts and the
resistance of #10 wire is 1.0 ohm per 1000 feet. If the distances are long, it may be necessary to
use heavier wire. Signal lamp wiring should be sized to allow at least 10 volts at the signal lamps.
External resistance in the wire and the lamp adjustment resistor should be about 1 ohm.

For wiring to the track, AWG #6 or larger wire must be used and should be kept to 200 feet or
less, per lead. The resistance of both leads added together should be less than 0.15 ohm. The
resistance of #6 wire is 0.4 ohm per 1000 feet. Special consideration for maximum track circuit
lengths possible must be taken for lead lengths above 200 feet. For wiring units over line wire use
AWG #6 or larger between units.

For other communications, outputs to relays or inputs such as code selects or auxiliary vital
inputs, use AWG #16 or larger wire.

Secondary lightning and surge protection is provided within the module. Primary arrestors and
equalizers are required on the supply and all track input/outputs. Arrestors are recommended for
inputs and outputs which travel on line wire circuits and/or over long distances and may be
subjected to primary lightning strikes.

Track polarity must be staggered on alternate track circuits. If the polarity of the received pulse is
not correct, the receiver will not detect it. This feature provides insulated joint breakdown
protection but only if the polarity on the opposite side of the IJ is reversed.

PRELIMINARY CHECKS AND SETTINGS

Before turning on the power to check the unit and adjust the track circuit, check the set of plans
associated with that location to verify that the correct type and number of modules are present,
that the battery power connections to B and N are correct and that all auxiliary inputs (+12 volt
nominal) are present and of correct polarity.

P2160A Vol. 1 9-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

At searchlight installations, if the lower heads are not used, strap the B terminal to the RG
terminals. If the Auxiliary I/O Board is used for outputs, but not inputs, strap the + and -
terminals to B and N terminals. If the Auxiliary I/O Board is used, but the power detect option is
not used, strap the + detect terminal to B and the - detect terminal to N.

At Intermediate, Repeater and Switch Lock Module locations, set the CODE 5 switch function on
the CPU Board as indicated by the set of plans. Code 5 provides block occupancy information
for Central Traffic Control for train location and therefore may be configured differently at
different locations. Switches A and B set conditions for transmitting CODE 5 to the WEST and
C and D set conditions for transmitting CODE 5 to the EAST. Table 9-1 lists the conditions for
CODE 5 transmission and the switch positions. Refer to Figure 9-1 for CODE 5 dip switch
positions.

Table 9-1. CPU’s SW3 Setting for Code 5 Transmission/Receive Attributes

CODE 5 TRANSMISSION: CPU SW3

1. Transmit CODE 5 to the WEST only when CODE 5 is received from A-ON, B-OFF
the EAST.
2. Transmit CODE 5 to the WEST only when CODE 1 is received from A-OFF, B-ON
the EAST.
3. Always transmit CODE 5 to the WEST. A-ON, B-ON
4. Never transmit CODE 5 to the WEST. A-OFF, B-OFF
5. Transmit CODE 5 to the EAST only when CODE 5 is received from C-ON, D-OFF
the WEST.
6. Transmit CODE 5 to the EAST only when CODE 1 is received from C-OFF, D-ON
the WEST.
7. Always transmit CODE 5 to the EAST. C-ON, D-ON
8. Never transmit CODE 5 to the EAST. C-OFF, D-OFF

FINAL CONNECTIONS

Before making the final connections to the track, check that the operation of the module is in
accordance with the requirements of the plans for that location.

If available, a Genrakode Test Unit can be used to verify a module’s operation. See the
Genrakode Test Unit User’s Manual (P2160TU) for more details on connecting and using the test
unit.

P2160A Vol. 1 9-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Once preliminary testing is finished, connect the track or line wire leads to the module and adjust
the track circuits using the procedure as outlined in Section 10, Track Circuit Adjustment.
Record all pertinent data in the Maintenance Record: track length, type of rail either bonded or
welded, converter settings both primary and secondary, and receiver screw switch settings.
Record the peak receiver current, the peak transmit current and the peak transmit voltage. At
Switch Lock locations record the overlay voltage. Initial and date the entries and note in the
comments column that the entry is for the initial system setup.

WARNING

The 59473-833-02 Converter/Receiver Line Driver board is only intended to

be used for line wire applications and must not be used in applications for
normal track operation. Usage may result in an unfavorable excess track
current in the receiver board, causing the inability to detect trains in the track
circuit.

DEPRESS SWITCH HERE

TO TURN OFF
D
C
B
A

OFF
SW3
ON

DEPRESS SWITCH HERE

TO TURN ON

Figure 9-1. Code 5 Function Setting Switch (SW3) on CPU Board

P2160A Vol. 1 9-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Safety Critical

Upon installation, verify the following items which are required for system safety.
Completed
• Track Circuit Adjustment [ ]
See Section 10 for instructions. The track circuits must be properly
adjusted to ensure that no codes are received when a 0.06 Ohm shunt is
applied.
• Track Lead Polarity [ ]
Track polarity must be staggered on alternate track circuits for insulated
joint (IJ) breakdown protection. See “General Rules” above.
• Line Wire Circuits [ ]
The 59473-833-02 Line Driver Converter/Receiver board is only intended
to be used for line wire applications and must not be used in applications
for normal track operation. Usage may result in excessive track current,
causing the inability to detect trains in the track circuit. See “General
Rules” above.

Operational

Upon installation, verify the following items which are not required for system safety but are
required for operation and functionality.
Completed
• Input Battery Voltage [ ]
Genrakode modules operate on input power ranging from 9 to 16 Volts
DC, nominally a 12 Volt signal battery. Check the B12 and N12 terminals.
See “General Rules” above.
• External Wiring [ ]
Check for proper connections from external apparatus to the Genrakode
module and that module inputs have proper polarity and voltage level.
See “General Rules” above.
• Code 5 Switch Settings [ ]
The Code 5 switches must be set according to the plans. See the
“ Preliminary Checks And Settings” section above.
• System Diagnostics [ ]
The system diagnostics should be checked to verify that there are no
system errors. This includes the board LEDs and the error table. See
Section 11 for diagnostics instructions.

P2160A Vol. 1 9-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Not Required

Upon installation and during normal operation, it is not necessary to verify the following items,
because the safety design of the system prevents the module from running if any of these do not
match the expectations of the application and location.

• Correct Boards in Correct Slots

The Genrakode module will not run if a board is in the incorrect slot or if
an expected board is missing. Board keying is also available to aid in
preventing incorrect board placement. . Damage to a board can occur if
placed into an incorrect slot, so care should be taken. Important: As per
the Safety Critical item above, do not use a Line Wire Converter/Receiver
board when connecting to track.
• Correct Software Checksums
The Genrakode module will only run if the Checksums of the EPROMs
match the expected values.
• Correct Rev/Site ID
The Genrakode module will only run if the wire-wrap signature matches
the Revision and Site ID of the loaded application.

P2160A Vol. 1 9-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

P2160A Vol. 1 9-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 10

TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

BASIC TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

The Converter/Receiver board 59473-833-01 must be used in track circuit applications, one at
each end of the track circuit, do not use Gr. 2 boards for track circuits. Track circuits must be
adjusted to be able to detect a train with a worst-case shunting impedance of 0.06 ohm. The
receiver sensitivity is 0.5 ampere for shunting. However, the receiver current should be adjusted
higher to take into consideration track variations and signal battery power supply variations.
Receive current should be adjusted to fall between 1.0 and 1.4 amperes. The current should be
adjusted closer to the low value if the adjustment is made on a wet track and closer to the high
value if the track is adjusted under arid conditions. Under normal weather, the current should be
adjusted to about 1.2 amperes.

Receiver current is set by adjusting the converter output voltage and the receiver input resistance.
There are four adjustments for the converter output voltage and eight receiver input adjustments.
A peak reading meter, a SimpsonR TS-111 or equivalent, or the Genrakode Track Current Test
Unit (20182-100 GR 1) is needed to read the pulsed DC current. The converter output is
adjustable from 1.5 to 4.0 volts and the receiver input resistance is adjustable from 0 ohm to 1.65
ohms. Adjustments are made by screw switches.

Table 10-1 lists the converter output voltages and the TAP selection and Table 10-2 lists the
receiver input resistance and switch positions required.

Table 10-1. Converter Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection.

OUTPUT VOLTAGE PRIMARY TAPS SECONDARY TAPS

(VOLTS)
1.5 L-L 1.5/2.0, 1.5/2.0
2.0 H-H 1.5/2.0, 1.5/2.0
3.0 L-L 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0
4.0 H-H 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0

P2160A Vol. 1 10-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 10-2. Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions.

TOTAL RECEIVER SWITCH POSITION:

RESISTANCE
(ohms) SS1 SS2 SS3
0 in in in
0.27 in out in
0.56 out in in
0.83 out out in
0.82 in in out
1.09 in out out
1.38 out in out
1.65 out out out

The module itself adds about 0.36 ohm in addition to the preceding listed values. Usually, the
converter output voltage will only need to be adjusted during the module installation. Table 10-3
lists a convenient starting point for converter output voltages and receiver input resistances for
given lengths of tracks at 3, 5, and 10 ohm ballast resistances for bonded or welded rails. If track
circuit readjustment is required, the adjustment can probably be achieved at only the receiver
location, without changing the transmit location.

Figure 10-2 depicts Converter/Receiver Board adjustment locations. To facilitate adjustment of

the receiver current, follow these steps.

1. Starting at either end of the track circuit, set the output voltage and the receiver resistance
switch positions as indicated in Tables 10-2 and 10-3 for the track circuit length, rail type,
and minimum ballast conditions. To do this, turn the module power off and remove the
receiver/converter board. Referring to Figure 10-2, place the screw switches in their
respective positions. Replace the receiver/converter board and turn the module power on.

2. At the other end of the track circuit, set the output voltage and the receiver resistance
switch positions as indicated in Tables 10-2 and 10-3, which will be the same settings as
the opposite end of the track circuit. Turn the module power off and remove the
receiver/converter board. Referring to Figure 10-2, place the screw switches in their
respective positions. Replace the receiver/converter board.

3. Disconnect the -TK (negative track) lead from the Genrakode module and connect the
peak reading meter in series such that the negative meter terminal is connected to the
negative rail and the positive meter terminal is connected to the -TK terminal on the
module. If the current test board is used, the track lead does not have to be disconnected.
Loosen the terminal nut and pull the washer away from the copper trace to open the
circuit. Then connect the positive and negative meter leads to the meter+ and meter-
terminals respectively.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 4. Turn on the module power and verify the received current is between 1.0 to 1.4 amperes.
If it is not, turn off the module power, remove the receiver/converter board, and re-adjust
the receiver resistance as required by moving the screw switch positions. Remember to
keep the track circuit conditions (wet/dry) in mind. Turn module power on. Repeat this
step until the receiver current is correct.

5. After the receiver current is correctly adjusted, place an 0.06 ohm shunt rail-to-rail across
the track circuit and note that the track occupancy LED (TRK) on the CPU board is on.
If it is not, the receiver current is too high. Repeat step 4 to decrease the receiver current.
If the TRK LED is on, remove the shunt and note that the track occupancy LED is off. If
it is not, the receiver current is too low. Repeat step 4 to increase the receiver current.

6. Return to the other end of the track circuit and set the screw switch to the same position
as the opposite end. Repeat steps 3 through 5 at this location. This completes the track
circuit adjustments.

Table 10-3. Transmit and Receive Settings for Rail Lengths.

MINIMUM XMIT OUTPUT RCVR RAIL LENGTH (FT)

BALLAST VOLTAGE (Volts) RESISTANCE BONDED WELDED
RESISTANCE (Ohms)
(Ohms/1000 FT)
10 1.5 0.27 under 8000 under 11000
10 1.5 0.00 8000 to 11500 11000 to 17000
10 2.0 0.00 11500 to 16000 17000 to 23000
10 3.0 0.27 16000 to 21000 23000 to 29000
5 1.5 0.27 under 5500 under 7500
5 1.5 0.00 5500 to 8500 7500 to 12000
5 2.0 0.00 8500 to 12000 12000 to 18000
5 3.0 0.27 12000 to 15000 18000 to 20000
3 1.5 0.27 under 4000 under 5000
3 1.5 0.00 4000 to 6500 5000 to 10000
3 2.0 0.00 6500 to 11000 10000 to 14000

Track circuit adjustments are based on 50-foot track leads (100 feet of wire) of AWG #6 cable at
each end of the track circuit. Table 10-4 provides a correlation between track ballast resistance
and the type of rail-to-rail connections and gives a value to be used for figuring track length
reductions for each additional 100 feet of track lead. An example follows to show how to use the
information in the table. Assume a track circuit that is rail head bonded, with 5-ohms ballast, has
a Genrakode Module 150 feet from the rails at one end of the track circuit (thus totaling 300 feet
of wire, 150 feet of track lead), and another Genrakode Module located 50 feet from the rails at
the other end of the track circuit (thus totaling 100 feet of wire, 50 feet of track lead). The result
is that the length of the track circuit should be reduced by 800 feet.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 10-4. Track Lead Increases vs. Track Length Reductions.

RAIL LENGTH REDUCTION (FT)

PER ADDITIONAL 100 FT. OF TRACK LEAD
Ballast (ohms) Bonded Welded
3 700 1100
5 800 1300
10 900 1500

BASIC LINE WIRE CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

The Converter/Receiver board 59473-833-02 must be used in line wire circuit applications, one at
each end of the line wire circuit, do not use 59473-833-01 boards for line wire circuits. The
receiver sensitivity is 0.25 ampere, however, the receiver current should be adjusted higher to take
into consideration line variations and battery power supply variations. Receive current should be
adjusted to fall between 0.5 and 0.7 amperes. Under normal conditions the current should be
adjusted to about 0.6 amperes.

Receiver current is set by adjusting the converter output voltage and the receiver input resistance.
There are four adjustments for the converter output voltage and eight receiver input adjustments.
A peak reading meter, a SimpsonR TS-111 or equivalent, or the Genrakode Track Current Test
Unit (20182-100-01) is needed to read the pulsed DC current. The converter output is adjustable
from 3.0 to 8.0 volts and the receiver input resistance is adjustable from 0 ohm to 3.56 ohms.
Adjustments are made by screw switches.

Table 10-5 lists the converter output voltages and switch positions. Table 10-6 lists the receiver
input resistance and switch positions required. Figure 10-2 shows the screw switch positions on
the board. The labels on the PC board have the following mapping:

Use the 1.5 V location for 3.0V setting

Use the 2.0 V location for 4.0V setting
Use the 3.0 V location for 6.0V setting
Use the 4.0 V location for 8.0V setting

Table 10-5. Converter Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection.

OUTPUT VOLTAGE PRIMARY TAPS SECONDARY TAPS

(VOLTS)
3.0 L-L 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0
4.0 H-H 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0
6.0 L-L 6.0/8.0, 6.0/8.0
8.0 H-H 6.0/8.0, 6.0/8.0

P2160A Vol. 1 10-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 10-6. Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions.

TOTAL RECEIVER SWITCH POSITION:

RESISTANCE
(ohms) SS1 SS2 SS3
0 in in in
0.56 in out in
1.00 out in in
1.56 out out in
2.00 in in out
2.56 in out out
3.00 out in out
3.56 out out out

Each module itself adds about 0.36 ohm besides the preceding listed values. Usually, the
converter output voltage will only need to be adjusted during the module installation. Table 10-7
lists a convenient starting point for converter output voltages and receiver input resistances for
given lengths of line wire. (The starting point values are only approximate because they largely
depend on the actual wire resistance per 1000 ft). If line wire circuit readjustment is required, the
adjustment can probably be achieved at only the receiver location, without changing the transmit
location.

Figure 10-3 depicts Converter/Receiver Board adjustment locations. To facilitate adjustment of

the receiver current, follow these steps.

1. Starting at one end of the line wire circuit, set the output voltage and the receiver
resistance switch positions as indicated in Table 10-7 for the line wire circuit length
(distance between units. Table 10-7 is for AWG #6 wire only, Table 10-8 and 10-9 are
for AWG #8 and #10 wire respectively. For a wire gauge not listed refer to Calculating
Converter Voltage and Receiver Res. settings below. To change settings turn the module
power off and remove the receiver/converter board. Referring to Figure 10-3, place the
screw switches in their respective positions. Replace the converter/receiver board and
turn the module power on.

2. At the other end of the line wire circuit, set the output voltage and the receiver resistance
switch positions to the same settings as in step 1. Turn the module power off and remove
the receiver/converter board. Referring to Figure 10-3, place the screw switches in their
respective positions. Replace the converter/receiver board.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 3. Disconnect the -TK (negative track) lead from the Genrakode module and connect a peak
reading meter in series such that the negative meter terminal is connected to the negative
line wire and the positive meter terminal is connected to the -TK terminal on the module.
If the current test board is used, the line wire lead does not have to be disconnected.
Loosen the terminal nut and pull the washer away from the copper trace to open the
circuit. Then connect the positive and negative meter leads to the meter+ and meter-
terminals respectively.

4. Turn on the module power and verify the received current is between 0.5 to 0.7 amperes.
If it is not, turn off the module power, remove the converter /receiver board, and re-adjust
the receiver resistance as required by moving the screw switch positions. Turn module
power on. Repeat this step until the receiver current is correct.

5. Return to the other end of the line wire circuit and set the screw switches to the same
positions as the opposite end. Repeat steps 3 and 4 at this location. This completes the
line wire circuit adjustments.

Table 10-7. Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (6 Gauge).

For AWG #6 Only

XMIT VOLTS RCVR RES WIRE LENGTH
(V) (Ohms) (Ft.)
3.00 2.00 under 2000
3.00 0.00 2000 to 4000
4.00 0.56 4000 to 6000
6.00 2.00 6000 to 8000
6.00 0.56 8000 to 10000
8.00 2.00 10000 to 12000
8.00 0.56 12000 to 14000
8.00 0.00 14000 to 15000

Table 10-8. Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (8 Gauge).

AWG #8 Only
XMIT VOLTS RCVR RES WIRE LENGTH
(V) (Ohms) (Ft.)
3.00 1.00 under 2000
4.00 0.00 2000 to 4000
6.00 1.00 4000 to 6000
8.00 1.56 6000 to 8000
8.00 0.00 8000 to 9400

P2160A Vol. 1 10-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 10-9. Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (10 Gauge).

AWG #10 Only

XMIT VOLTS RCVR RES WIRE LENGTH
(V) (Ohms) (Ft.)
3.00 0.56 under 1500
4.00 0.00 1500 to 2500
6.00 1.00 2500 to 3500
8.00 0.00 3500 to 5500

Calculating Converter Voltage and Receiver Res. Settings For Line Wire Circuits

The settings for the converter voltage and receiver resistance can be approximately determined
using the following method:

Vxmit
1000 * ( ---------- - ( 2 * Rmod + Rrcvr) )
Ircv.
L = -------------------------------------------------------------
2 * Rwire

Where L is the distance between modules in feet, Vxmit is the converter output voltage
setting in Volts, Ircv. is the desired received current: 0.6A, Rmod is the Module
resistance: 0.5 Ohms, Rrcvr is the Receiver input resistance setting, Rwire is the
Resistance per 1000 ft of the wire between the modules.

1. Determine the wire resistance per 1000 ft.

2. Use the lowest converter voltage setting for Vxmit: 3.0 V
3. Use 0 for Rrcvr.
4. Calculate L with the formula below

Vxmit
1000 * ( ---------- - ( 1 + Rrcvr) )
0.6
L = -----------------------------------------------------
2 * Rwire

5. A distance of 0 - 1500 feet over the target distance is required. If L is too small
increase the converter voltage Vxmit to the next higher setting. Repeat step 4 and 5 until
the desired length is found.
6. Now use resistance values from Table 10-6 for Rrcvr starting with the smallest value.
7. Calculate L using formula adjusting Rrcvr to get to L closest to the desired length as
possible.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Example: Target distance is 3200 ft., #8 gauge wire is used. Actual measured wire resistance per
1000 ft = 0.653 Ohms.

1. Start with Vxmit = 3.0 V and Rrcvr = 0.0, Calculated L = 3062 ft. This is not long
enough so go to the next voltage setting.

2. Now use Vxmit = 4.0 V and Rrcvr = 0.0, Calculated L = 4339 ft. This is within the 0 -
1500 ft. range.

3. Increase Rrcvr to 0.56 Ohms, Calculated L = 3910 ft. Do another calculation to see if
we can get closer.

4. Increase Rrcvr to 1.00 Ohms, Calculated L = 3573 ft. Do another calculation to see if
we can get closer.

5. Increase Rrcvr to 1.56 Ohms, Calculated L = 3144 ft. We are just below 3200 ft. so
one could choose 1.00 or 1.56 Ohms, to just be over 0.6A at the receiver, choose Rrcvr =
1.00 Ohms and Vxmit = 4.0 V setting.

SERIES OVERLAY TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

A Series Overlay is used at Switch Lock locations to provide quick release of the lock when the
track is occupied. AWG #6 twisted pair should be used to connect the module series overlay
input/output to the rails. The Series Overlay Board can accommodate up to 500 feet of AWG #6
twisted pair. If AWG #9 twisted pair is used, the lead length should not exceed 300 feet. A three
position screw switch is provided to compensate for feed lead-length to the track. It is important
for proper operation that the overlay track lead wires be a twisted pair with a minimum of 1 twist
per foot to minimize the inductance of the wires.

The following procedure should be used to set up the series overlay track circuit. Figure 10-1
shows the screw switches for the series overlay.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SS1
SS2

SS3
Series Overlay Board 59473-877-01

R101

J2 J1

Figure 10-1. Series Overlay Adjustment Locations.

1. When initially setting up the series overlay track circuit, check that the screw switch is in
the SS1 position.

2. Turn sensitivity pot adjustment R101 fully counterclockwise.

3. Connect a shunt strap with a 0.06 ohm resistor across the rails 80 feet from the overlay
track connection.

4. Turn on the module power. The LED on the Series Overlay Board will be out. Turn
R101 slowly clockwise until the LED turns on. If the LED does not turn on, turn off the
module power and place the screw switch in position SS2. Repeat step 3. (SS1 is
normally used for cable lengths up to 300 feet; SS2 is usually used for lengths of 200 to
400 feet; SS3 is used for lengths of 300 feet to 500 feet). Always start with the switch at
SS1.

5. Measure the overlay rms output voltage between J1 and J2. Record the output voltage
and the switch setting.

6. Remove the shunt strap and note that the LED turns off. This completes the overlay track
circuit adjustment.

AAR terminal layout and circuit board assignments are shown in the Repeater module’s layout and
associated parts listing in Section 1 in Volume 2.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

CAB SIGNAL TRACK CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

The cab signal output power should be adjusted to provide 3 amps at the entering end of the track
circuit through a shunt.

The following procedure tells how to adjust the output power of the Cab Signal Module.

1. Set the output power by placing a jumper, AWG #10 or larger, across AAR terminal TK-
and the AAR terminal setting suggested in Table 10-5.

2. Turn on the Cab Signal Module power and the controlling track module power.

3. At the entering end of the track circuit, place a shunt across the rails with a Simpson TS-
111 meter or equivalent, set at 30 amps AC, in series and verify that the current is 3 amps
or greater. If the current is too low, then remove the shunt, turn off the module power,
place the jumper on the next higher setting and repeat steps 2 and 3.

Table 10-10. Track Length vs. Cab Signal Power Setting

OUTPUT
RAIL LENGTH (ft) POWER SETTING
0 to 1000 25%
1000 to 3500 50%
3500 to 6000 80%
6000 to 7500 100%

CAUTION

For steady cab do not use the 100% power setting because if the module is
operated too long an internal PC board may overheat and fail.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Track Converter/Receiver Board Adjustment Locations
59473-833-01

Transmitter Converter adjustment by screw-switch selection on transformer T2

Primary Side Secondary Side

Screw-Switch Screw-Switch
Output (tap) (tap)
(volts) Selection Selection
1.5 L-L 1.5-2.0 & 1.5-2.0
2.0 H-H 1.5-2.0 &1.5-2.0
3.0 L-L 3.0-4.0 & 3.0-4.0
4.0 H-H 3.0-4.0 & 3.0-4.0

Receiver adjustment by screw-switch selection of resistors SS1, SS2 and SS3.

Receiver
Resistance
(ohms) SS1 SS2 SS3
0.00 IN IN IN
0.27 IN OUT IN
0.56 OUT IN IN
0.83 OUT OUT IN
0.82 IN IN OUT
1.09 IN OUT OUT
1.38 OUT IN OUT
1.65 OUT OUT OUT
Storage Area for Unused Receiver

Converter/Receiver Board
Component Layout - 59473-833-01
Adjustment Screws.

Secondary Side Primary Side

T2
Secondary Side

4.0 3.0
Primary Side

L
2.0 1.5
H
SS2 SS1
SS3

2.0 1.5
4.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 H
3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 L
|

L H

H
| |

4.0 3.0
L
L H

H L
T2 Screw - Switch Taps
|

Converter/Receiver Board

Figure 10-2. Track Converter/Receiver Board Adjustment Locations

P2160A Vol. 1 10-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Line Wire Converter/Receiver Board Adjustment Locations
59473-833-02

Transmitter Converter adjustment by screw-switch selection on transformer T2

Primary Side Secondary Side

Screw-Switch Screw-Switch
Output (tap) (tap)
(volts) Selection Selection
3.0 L-L 1.5-2.0 & 1.5-2.0
4.0 H-H 1.5-2.0 & 1.5-2.0
6.0 L-L 3.0-4.0 & 3.0-4.0
8.0 H-H 3.0-4.0 & 3.0-4.0

Receiver adjustment by screw-switch selection of resistors SS1, SS2 and SS3.

Receiver
Resistance
(ohms) SS1 SS2 SS3
0.00 IN IN IN
0.56 IN OUT IN
1.00 OUT IN IN
1.56 OUT OUT IN
2.00 IN IN OUT
2.56 IN OUT OUT
3.00 OUT IN OUT
3.56 OUT OUT OUT

Converter/Receiver Board
Storage Area for Unused Receiver

Component Layout - 59473-833-02

Adjustment Screws.

Secondary Side Primary Side

T2
Secondary Side

4.0 3.0
Primary Side

L
2.0 1.5
H
SS2 SS1
SS3

2.0 1.5
4.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 H
3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 L
|

L H

H
| |

4.0 3.0
L
L H

H L
T2 Screw - Switch Taps
|

Converter/Receiver Board

Figure 10-3. Line Wire Converter/Receiver Board Adjustment Locations.

P2160A Vol. 1 10-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 11

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE APPROACH

A systematic approach to preventive maintenance can be used to insure continued satisfactory

operation of the Genrakode DC-coded equipment.

1. Track circuit adjustment should be verified whenever track work is performed, such as
welding, bonding, ballast cleaning, etc. See below for Track Maintenance instructions.
• Adjustment should also be verified periodically as required by federal and railroad
regulations.
• Track lead polarity should be verified if track work has created the risk of a swap of the
leads.

2. The system diagnostics should be checked whenever a location is visited. This includes the
board LEDs and the error table.

3. See Section 12 for Troubleshooting instructions. The Genrakode module will not run if a
board is in the incorrect slot or if an expected board is missing.
• Board keying is also available to aid in preventing incorrect board placement.
• Damage to a board can occur if placed into an incorrect slot, so care should be taken.
• If the CPU board is replaced, the Code 5 switches must be set. See Section 9 for
instructions.
• If the Converter/Receiver board is replaced, set the screw switches to match the board
that was removed and then verify the adjustment of the track circuit. See below for Track
Maintenance instructions. The track circuits must be properly adjusted to ensure that no
codes are received when a 0.06 Ohm shunt is applied. Important: Do not use a Line
Wire Converter/Receiver board when connecting to track.

TRACK CIRCUIT MAINTENANCE

If during the installation of the equipment, a permanent record was generated of the track circuit
data, this can serve as a future reference for routine track maintenance or as an aid for isolating
troubles. A maintenance schedule consistent with good railroad safety practices should be set up
and complied with.

The Track Maintenance Log form is shown in Appendix D. During the installation; the track
length, rail type, initial Converter screw-switch settings, and Receiver screw-switch settings were
recorded. If readjustment of the screw-switches is required, the new settings should be noted in
the comments column. The fifth column applies to the Switch Lock Module only.

P2160A Vol. 1 11-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT

The recommended equipment needed for track maintenance is a peak reading multimeter such as
a SimpsonR TS-111 or equivalent and a track shunt strap with a 0.06 ohm resistor.

MAINTENANCE TEST PROCEDURE

1. Set a peak reading ammeter to its 3-ampere scale and measure the peak receive current. If
the Current Test Board is used on the module, loosen the nut on the +METER terminal
and pull the washer away from the board. Connect the meter negative lead to the -TK
terminal and the positive lead to the +METER terminal. If the Current Test Board is not
used, it will be necessary to disconnect the -TK lead. The meter positive lead is connected
to -TK terminal and the negative lead of the meter is connected to the wire from the minus
track. Record the peak receive current.

2. With the nut loosened on the +METER terminal of the Current Test Board and the washer
away from the board, connect the positive lead of the meter to the -TK terminal and the
negative lead of the meter to the +METER terminal. Measure the peak transmit current.
If the Current Test Board is not used with the minus track wire disconnected from the -
TK terminal, connect the positive lead of the meter to the minus track wire and the
negative meter lead to the -TK terminal. After both receive and transmit current have
been measured, remove the ammeter and restore the track connections and Test Board
connections. Record the peak transmit current.

3. Using a peak reading voltmeter set to the 15-volt scale, measure the transmit output by
connecting the positive terminal on the +TK terminal and the negative lead on the -TK
terminal. Record the peak transmit voltage reading.

4. Using a DC voltmeter, read and record the battery voltage from the B terminal to the N
terminal.

5. Connect the shunt strap with the 0.06 ohm resistor across the rails and verify that the TRK
LED light for the appropriate direction is on. Remove the shunt strap.

6. If the location uses a Switch Lock Module, measure the overlay input by connecting an
rms voltmeter between J1 and J2 of Overlay Board PC8. Record the rms overlay input
voltage.

7. Connect the shunt strap with the 0.06 ohm resistor across the rails 80 feet away from the
track connections and verify that the LED on PC8, the overlay board, is on. Remove the
shunt strap.

P2160A Vol. 1 11-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 SECTION 12
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS

TROUBLESHOOTING
To facilitate isolation of failures in the track circuits, Genrakode utilizes LEDs on the Converter
/Receiver, Vital Power Supply (VPC), Auxiliary I/O, and CPU boards in all Genrakode Modules.
The Switch Lock Module has three additional PC board types not used in the Control Point,
Repeater or Intermediate modules. These three boards are the Series Overlay, the Vital Timer
and the Switch Lock I/O boards which also have LEDS. The PC board arrangement with the
LEDs and test points are shown for each module in Figures 12-1 through 12-6 which follow
Table 12-2. If the problem has been isolated to the module itself, the diagnostics isolate the
problem to the board level.
When going on a trouble call, take the following items: a peak reading multimeter such as a TS-
111 or equivalent, a shunt strap with a 0.06 ohm resistor and a complete set of spare boards.
Because Genrakode has internal software diagnostics, it is relatively easy to determine if the fault
is in the module. Before trying to locate the trouble, make sure that the LED switch on the CPU
is in the ON position.
1. If all LEDs are out, check the battery input voltage at terminals B to N. If the proper
voltage is present, check the two fuses located on the motherboard. If the fuses are good,
the problem may be in the CPU Board. Replace the CPU Board.
2. If the VPC LED turns on, then off every 10 seconds, the problem is in one of the other
boards. The diagnostics will help isolate which of the boards it is. Refer to the
DIAGNOSTICS section on the next page.
3. If no code is being decoded, indicated by none of the received code LEDs being on, check
that the receiver section of the Converter/Receiver Board is operating by checking that the
TEST LED flashes approximately every 2.8 seconds. If the receiver is operating, check
that the received current is above 0.5 ampere. For normal operation it should be above
0.75 ampere. If the current is below the required threshold, check as follows:
a. Check that all track connections are tight and that the Converter/Receiver Board is
seated properly.
b. Set the sensitivity of the receiver to maximum to determine if the current
increases.

c. Replace the Converter/Receiver Board.

d. Determine if sufficient transmit current is being received. Remove the 0.06 ohm
resistor from the shunt strap and connect the peak reading ammeter to the shunt
strap. Set the meter to the 6-ampere scale and connect the shunt strap with the
meter across the rails.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 e. Check that the module transmitting to this unit is operating correctly.

f. Check for open joints or a broken rail in the track circuit.

4. If the module is transmitting, as indicated by the XMIT LED on the Converter/Receiver

Board flashing at the transmit code rate, check the peak output voltage with a peak
reading voltmeter. If it is low, remove one of the track leads and measure the open circuit
voltage to determine if there is a short loading the module. If the output of the converter
remains low with the lead off, replace the Converter/Repeater Board.

5. If the module is not transmitting, check all vital input connections.

a. On Control Point Modules, check that the CNT1 (code 1 select) terminal is
connected.

b. On Control Point Modules, verify that only one vital code is being selected.

c. If an Auxiliary I/O Board is used, check that both EAST + and WEST + voltages
are present.

d. On Switch Lock Modules, check that there is voltage between +NPW and -NPW
and between +RMTE OL and -RMTE OL, and that there is no voltage between
UNL REQ and N.

e. On Switch Lock Modules, if the Series Overlay LED is on with no shunt across
the rails, check the circuit adjustment of the series overlay circuit. Replace the
Series Overlay PC Board if necessary.

DIAGNOSTICS

System & Application Software Errors

All Genrakode modules have internal diagnostics to help the maintainer return a failed location to
working order. As the CPU runs the program, various tests and checks are continuously made on
the hardware internal and external to the microcontroller chip on the CPU board. These tests and
checks must indicate that all phases of operation are being executed correctly. If anything is
detected as being incorrect, the CPU shuts down the VPC(s) to remove power from all outputs
and to disable code transmission. After a delay period of ten seconds, the CPU will restart the
program and continue its tests and checks. To enable the maintainer to diagnose a problem, the
CPU places a number into a special section of memory called an error table. The number placed
into this table is called an error code. Every time the CPU detects a fault, it places an error code
into the error table. To gain access to the error table, the reset and LED test switch on the CPU
board can be manipulated to display the error code using the LEDs located on the CPU board
edge. Aside from displaying the error code, the diagnostics also display the board most likely to
be responsible for the system failure.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The error table is simply a section of RAM (random access memory) that is dedicated to storing
error codes. If for any reason the system should fail, an error code will be written to the error
table. A new error code will always over-write an old error code. As long as power is never
removed from the module, the error table will always reflect the last error detected. This is a
useful tool to keep track of system performance. The error table can be interrogated at any time
without disturbing the operation of the location.

When the module is first powered up, the error table is filled with random numbers. To clear and
initialize the error table, perform the following procedure:

Initializing the error table:

1. Toggle and hold the CPU LED test switch (located on the CPU Board) in the TEST
position (up).

2. While holding the CPU LED test switch in the TEST (up) position, press and release the
CPU RESET push-button.

3. Return the CPU LED test switch to the ON (down) position. The contents (random
numbers) of the error table are now being displayed. The CPU RESET LED will flash to
indicate the system is in the diagnostic mode. Note: all signals will go dark (if signals are
being driven) and no codes will be transmitted. The automatic restart feature is also
disabled.

4. Toggle the CPU LED test switch to the TEST (up) position and then back to the ON
(down) position. The CPU RESET LED will flash to indicate the module is in the
diagnostic mode. All other LEDs will be off, indicating the error table is clear.

5. The system will remain in the diagnostics mode indefinitely. To return the module to
operation, press and release the RESET push-button.

The error table is now clear. To check the contents of the error table while the module
operates, perform the two-step procedure below.

Note: This procedure in no way effects the operation of the module and it can be
executed as often as required.

To interrogate the error table at anytime:

1. Toggle the CPU LED test switch to the TEST (up) position and then back to the ON
(down) position. The CPU RESET LED will flash to indicate the module is in the
diagnostic mode. If all the remaining LEDs are off, no error has occurred since the last
time the error table was cleared. If other LEDs are on, either the module power was
removed or an error has occurred. Refer to the section on interpreting the error codes to
determine the system fault.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 2. Toggle the CPU LED test switch to the TEST (up) position and then back to the ON
(down) position. The CPU RESET LED will go off and the system status will be
displayed.

If a hardware failure occurs, the CPU will put the error code into the error table and restart the
program after a ten second delay. During this delay, the CPU LEDs will "count down" to indicate
that the delay is in progress. When the delay is complete, the CPU will try to run the program
again. If the failure is again detected, the error code will be written to the error table and the
CPU will start the program over. This cycle will continue until the fault is corrected. To
interrogate the error table, the start-reset-start sequence must be disabled. To accomplish this,
follow the procedure below:

To interrogate the error table during a failure:

1. Toggle and hold the CPU LED test switch (located on the CPU board) in the TEST
position (up).

2. While holding the CPU LED test switch in the TEST (up) position, press and release the
CPU RESET push-button.

3. Return the CPU LED test switch to the ON (down) position. The contents of the
error table are now being displayed. The CPU RESET LED will flash to indicate the
system is in the diagnostic mode. The error code and the board suspected of failure will
be indicated by the CPU LEDS. Refer to the next section to interpret the indications.

Note: All signals will go dark (if signals are being driven) and no codes will be
transmitted. The automatic restart feature is disabled.

If you wish to save the error table contents for retrieval at another time, go to step 5.

Note: If the error table content is saved, it will be over-written if another failure occurs.
If you wish to clear the error table, go to step 4.

4. To clear the error table and return the module to operation, toggle the CPU LED test
switch to the TEST (up) position and then back to the ON (down) position. The CPU
RESET LED will flash to indicate the module is in the diagnostic mode. All other LEDs
will be off, indicating the error table is clear.

5. The system will remain in the diagnostics mode. To return the module to normal
operation, press and release the RESET push button.

The error code is displayed in binary fashion using the top eight LEDs on the CPU board. The
topmost LED is the most significant LED and the eighth LED from the top is the least significant
LED.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The LEDs labeled EAST CODES OUT on the CPU Board are used to indicate which board the
CPU assesses to be the cause of the fault. Table 12-1 shows which LED corresponds to the
various system boards. Note that not all boards are used in all modules.

Table 12-1. Faulty Board Identification by CPU LED Indications

LED ON BOARD
CODE 1 CPU
CODE 2 *a) EAST OUTPUT
CODE 3 *b) WEST OUTPUT
CODE 4 EAST RCVR/CONVERTER
CODE 5 WEST RCVR/CONVERTER
CODE 7 *c) CODE SELECT
CODE 8 AUX I/O

*a) In Switch Lock Module this LED is used for the Series Overlay Board.
*b) In Switch Lock Module this LED is used for the Switch Lock I/O Board.
*c) In Switch Lock Module this LED is used for the Timer Board.

See Table 12-2 to interpret the LED’s meaning. An error code that is displayed but is not listed in
the table may indicate that the power was removed from the module or that the CPU Board itself
has failed. Also, if a VPC fails, the system interprets the failure as an output or other type of
system failure. Insure that the VPC(s) starts running by measuring the VPC output voltage or
observing the LED on the VPC Board. Refer to the preceding TROUBLESHOOTING section.

Symbols X and O in the first column represent the top eight LEDs on the CPU Board. An
X indicates that the LED is on, an 0 indicates the LED is off. The leftmost symbol corresponds to
the top LED.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

GENRAKODE ERROR CODES

Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

0000000 X 01 CPU BOARD: state of latch U8 is Replace CPU Board.

incorrect.
000000X 0 02 CPU BOARD: software does not match Insure that wire wrap
hardware wire wrap code. code is correct for
installed software.
Replace CPU Board.
000000X X 03 CPU BOARD: internal count low is Replace CPU Board.
incorrect.
00000X0 0 04 CPU BOARD: internal count high is Replace CPU Board.
incorrect.
00000X0 X 05 CPU BOARD: internal timer low is Replace CPU Board.
incorrect.
00000XX 0 06 CPU BOARD: internal timer high is Replace CPU Board.
incorrect.
00000XX X 07 CPU BOARD: EPROM signature error. Replace EPROM(s).
0000X00 0 08 CPU BOARD: U15 is in an incorrect state Replace CPU Board.
during an EAST code select read.
0000X00 X 09 CPU BOARD: invalid code 5 switch
Insure correct switch
selection for the Repeater. setting for code 5
selection; if it still
fails, replace CPU
Board.
000X000 0 10 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST
1 output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
000X000 X 11 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST
2 output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
000X00X 0 12 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST
3 output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

000X00X X 13 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST

4 output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
000X0X0 0 14 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST
5 output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
000X0X0 X 15 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST
6/HR output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
000X0XX 0 16 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST
7 output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
000X0XX X 17 EAST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: code Replace EAST
8 output failure. Decode Output Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00X0000 0 20 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: board ID Replace EAST
failure (U29, U32). Searchlight Drive
Board.
00X0000 X 21 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: latch U28 bits Replace EAST
4, 5, 6, and/or 7 incorrect. Searchlight Drive
Board.
00X000X 0 22 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp A Replace EAST
filament check failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or EAST
VPC Board.
00X000X X 23 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp B Replace EAST
filament check failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or EAST
VPC Board.
00X00X0 0 24 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp A drive Replace EAST
failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or EAST
VPC Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

00X00X0 X 25 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp B drive Replace EAST

failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or EAST
VPC Board.
00X00XX 0 26 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: latch U27 Replace EAST
incorrect data. Searchlight Drive
Board.
00X00XX X 27 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: buffer U26 Replace EAST
incorrect data. Searchlight Drive
Board.
00X0X00 0 28 EAST SA DRIVE BOARD: board ID Replace EAST
failure (U27, U31). Searchlight Drive
Board.
00XX000 0 30 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: board Replace EAST Color
ID failure (U2, U27). Light Drive Board.
00XX000 X 31 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: board Replace EAST Color
ID failure (U1, U9). Light Drive Board.
00XX00X 0 32 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 1 Replace EAST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XX00X X 33 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 2 Replace EAST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XX0X0 0 34 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 3 Replace EAST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XX0X0 X 35 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 4 Replace EAST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XX0XX 0 36 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 5 Replace EAST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

00XX0XX X 37 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 6 Replace EAST Color

drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XXX00 0 38 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 1 Replace EAST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XXX00 X 39 EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 2 Replace EAST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XXX0X 0 3A EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 3 Replace EAST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XXX0X X 3B EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 4 Replace EAST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XXXX0 0 3C EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 5 Replace EAST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XXXX0 X 3D EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 6 Replace EAST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or EAST VPC
Board.
00XXXXX 0 3E EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: buffer Replace EAST Color
U4 bit 6 and/or 7 failure. Light Drive Board.
00XXXXX X 3F EAST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: buffer Replace EAST Color
U5 bit 6 and/or 7 failure. Light Drive Board.
0X00000 0 40 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST
code 1 output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

0X00000 X 41 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST

code 2 output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X0000X 0 42 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST
code 3 output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X0000X X 43 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST
code 4 output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X000X0 0 44 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST
code 5 output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X000X0 X 45 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST
code 6/HR output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X000XX 0 46 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST
code 7 output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X000XX X 47 WEST DECODE OUTPUT BOARD: Replace WEST
code 8 output failure. Decode Output
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X0X000 0 50 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: board ID Replace WEST
failure (U29, U32). Searchlight Drive
Board.
0X0X000 X 51 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: latch U28 Replace WEST
bits 4, 5, 6, and/or 7 incorrect. Searchlight Drive
Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

0X0X00X 0 52 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp A Replace WEST

filament check failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X0X00X X 53 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp B Replace WEST
filament check failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X0X0X0 0 54 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp A drive Replace WEST
failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X0X0X0 X 55 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: lamp B drive Replace WEST
failure. Searchlight Drive
Board and/or WEST
VPC Board.
0X0X0XX 0 56 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: latch U27 Replace WEST
incorrect data. Searchlight Drive
Board.
0X0X0XX X 57 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: buffer U26 Replace WEST
incorrect data. Searchlight Drive
Board.
0X0XX00 0 58 WEST SA DRIVE BOARD: board ID Replace WEST
failure (U27, U31). Searchlight Drive
Board.
0XX0000 0 60 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: board Id Replace WEST Color
failure (U2, U27). Light Drive Board.
0XX0000 X 61 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: board Replace WEST Color
ID failure (U1, U9). Light Drive Board.
0XX000X 0 62 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 1 Replace WEST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX000X X 63 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 2 Replace WEST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

0XX00X0 0 64 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 3 Replace WEST Color

drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX00X0 X 65 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 4 Replace WEST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX00XX 0 66 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 5 Replace WEST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX00XX X 67 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 6 Replace WEST Color
drive failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX0X00 0 68 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 1 Replace WEST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX0X00 X 69 WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 2 Replace WEST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX0X0X 0 6A WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 3 Replace WEST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX0X0X X 6B WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 4 Replace WEST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX0XX0 0 6C WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 5 Replace WEST Color
filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

0XX0XX0 X 6D WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: lamp 6 Replace WEST Color

filament check failure. Light Drive Board
and/or WEST VPC
Board.
0XX0XXX 0 6E WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: buffer Replace WEST Color
U4 bit 6 and/or 7 failure. Light Drive Board.
0XX0XXX X 6F WEST COLOR LIGHT BOARD: buffer Replace WEST Color
U5 bit 6 and/or 7 failure. Light Drive Board.
0XXX000 0 70 EAST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: ID Replace EAST
failure (U7, U8). Receiver/Converter
Board.
0XXX000 X 71 EAST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace EAST
true level detector (Q7, Q8) not logic 1 Receiver/Converter
during upper level test. Board.
0XXX00X 0 72 EAST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace EAST
complement level detector (Q4, Q5) not Receiver/Converter
logic 0 during upper level test. Board.
0XXX00X X 73 EAST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace EAST
true level detector (Q7, Q8) not logic 0 Receiver/Converter
during lower level test. Board.
0XXX0X0 0 74 EAST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace EAST
complement level detector (Q4, Q5) not Receiver/Converter
logic 1 during lower level test. Board.
X000000 0 80 WEST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace WEST
ID failure (U7, U8). Receiver/Converter
Board.
X000000 X 81 WEST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace WEST
true level detector (Q7, Q8) not logic 1 Receiver/Converter
during upper level test. Board.
X00000X 0 82 WEST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace WEST
complement level detector (Q4, Q5) not Receiver/Converter
logic 0 during upper level test. Board.
X00000X X 83 WEST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace WEST
true level detector (Q7, Q8) not logic 0 Receiver/Converter
during lower level test. Board.
X0000X0 0 84 WEST RCVR/CONVERTER BOARD: Replace WEST
complement level detector (Q4, Q5) not Receiver/Converter
logic 1 during lower level test. Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-13 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

X00X000 0 90 Code Select Board: EAST ID error (U22, Replace Code Select
U25). Board.
X00X000 X 91 Code Select Board: WEST ID error (U21, Replace Code Select
U24). Board.
X00X00X 0 92 Code Select Board: WEST code select Replace Code Select
responding when reading EAST code Board.
inputs.
X00X00X X 93 Code Select Board: EAST code select Replace Code Select
responding when reading WEST code Board.
inputs.
X00X0X0 0 94 Code Select Board: data bus not read as a Replace Code Select
logic 1 when reading buffer U19-6. EAST Board.
failure.
X00X0X0 X 95 Code Select Board: opto-isolator failure Replace Code Select
U10 to U17. EAST failure. Board.
X00X0XX 0 96 Code Select Board: buffer U19 responding Replace Code Select
when disabled or data bus not logic 1 when Board.
reading U19-6. EAST failure.
X00X0XX X 97 Code Select Board: data bus not read as a Replace Code Select
logic 1 when reading buffer U19-6. EAST Board.
failure.
X00XX00 0 98 Code Select Board: opto-isolator failure Replace Code Select
U10 to U17. EAST failure. Board.
X00XX00 X 99 Code Select Board: buffer U19 responding Replace Code Select
when disabled or data bus not logic 1 when Board.
reading U19-6. EAST failure.
X00XX0X 0 9A Code Select Board: data bus not read as a Replace Code Select
logic 1 when reading buffer U19-8. WEST Board.
failure.
X00XX0X X 9B Code Select Board: opto-isolator failure Replace Code Select
U1 to U8. WEST failure. Board.
X00XXX0 0 9C Code Select Board: buffer U19 responding Replace Code Select
when disabled or data bus not logic 1 when Board.
reading U19-8. WEST failure.
X00XXX0 X 9D Code Select Board: data bus not read as a Replace Code Select
logic 1 when reading buffer U19-8. WEST Board.
failure.
X00XXXX 0 9E Code Select Board: opto-isolator failure Replace Code Select
U1 to U8. WEST failure. Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-14 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

X00XXXX X 9F Code Select Board: buffer U19 responding Replace Code Select
when disabled or data bus not logic 1 when Board.
reading U19-8. WEST failure.
X0X0000 0 A0 AUXILIARY I/O BOARD: (U20, U23). Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X0000 X A1 BOARD ID FAILURE (U20, U23) or U21 Replace Aux. I/O
failure. Board.
X0X000X 0 A2 W. CAB OUTPUT FAILURE. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X000X X A3 W. EX OUTPUT FAILURE. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X00X0 0 A4 E. CAB OUTPUT FAILURE. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X00X0 X A5 E. EX OUTPUT FAILURE. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X00XX 0 A6 U20 bit 5Q, U19 bit 2Y1 failure. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X00XX X A7 U20 bit 6Q, U19 bit 2Y2 failure. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X0X00 0 A8 U20 bit 7Q, U19 bit 2Y3 failure. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0X0X00 X A9 U20 bit 8Q, U19 bit 2Y4 failure. Replace Aux. I/O
Board.
X0XX000 0 B0 EAST CHECKWORD 1 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XX000 X B1 EAST CHECKWORD 2 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XX00X 0 B2 EAST CHECKWORD 3 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XX00X X B3 EAST CHECKWORD 4 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XX0X0 0 B4 EAST CHECKWORD 5 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XX0X0 X B5 EAST CHECKWORD 6 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
or
Faulty EAST Rcvr/Converter Board Replace EAST
Rcvr/Converter
Board
X0XX0XX 0 B6 EAST CHECKWORD 7 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XX0XX X B7 EAST CHECKWORD 8 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XXX00 0 B8 EAST CHECKWORD 9 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XXX00 X B9 EAST CHECKWORD 10 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XXX0X 0 BA EAST CHECKWORD 11 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XXX0X X BB EAST CHECKWORD 12 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-15 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

X0XXXX0 0 BC EAST CHECKWORD 13 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.

X0XXXX0 X BD EAST CHECKWORD 14 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XXXXX 0 BE EAST CHECKWORD 15 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
X0XXXXX X BF EAST CHECKWORD 16 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00000 0 C0 EAST CHECKWORD 17 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00000 X C1 EAST CHECKWORD 18 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0000X 0 C2 EAST CHECKWORD 19 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0000X X C3 EAST CHECKWORD 20 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX000X0 0 C4 WEST CHECKWORD 1 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX000X0 X C5 WEST CHECKWORD 2 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX000XX 0 C6 WEST CHECKWORD 3 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX000XX X C7 WEST CHECKWORD 4 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00X00 0 C8 WEST CHECKWORD 5 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00X00 X C9 WEST CHECKWORD 6 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
or
Faulty WEST Rcvr/Converter Board Replace WEST
Rcvr/Converter
Board.
XX00X0X 0 CA WEST CHECKWORD 7 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00X0X X CB WEST CHECKWORD 8 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00XX0 0 CC WEST CHECKWORD 9 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00XX0 X CD WEST CHECKWORD 10 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00XXX 0 CE WEST CHECKWORD 11 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX00XXX X CF WEST CHECKWORD 12 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X000 0 D0 WEST CHECKWORD 13 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X000 X D1 WEST CHECKWORD 14 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X00X 0 D2 WEST CHECKWORD 15 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X00X X D3 WEST CHECKWORD 16 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X0X0 0 D4 WEST CHECKWORD 17 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X0X0 X D5 WEST CHECKWORD 18 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X0XX 0 D6 WEST CHECKWORD 19 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XX0X0XX X D7 WEST CHECKWORD 20 FAILURE. Replace CPU Board.
XXX0000 0 E0 SERIES OVERLAY cannot be identified. Replace Series
Overlay Board.
XXX0000 X E1 SERIES OVERLAY indicates occupancy Replace Series
while Signal Clearing Codes are being Overlay Board.
received.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-16 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

XXX0X00 0 E8 TIMER BOARD FAILURE: possible Verify configuration

short, open, or jumper missing, or of Timer Board, if
incorrectly configured. failure still occurs
then replace it.
XXX0X00 X E9 TIMER BOARD fails ID test. Replace Timer Board.
XXXX000 0 F0 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD fails ID test Replace Switch Lock
(U24 or U25). I/O Board.
XXXX000 X F1 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot Replace Switch Lock
identify W. LC/UC Selection (U15 or U16). I/O Board.
XXXX00X 0 F2 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD jumper Install jumper at W1,
missing for W LC/UC Selection. W2, W3, W4 or W5
(refer to Section 6 for
details).
XXXX00X X F3 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot Replace Switch Lock
identify E. LC/UC Selection (U17 or U18). I/O Board.
XXXX0X0 0 F4 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD jumper Install jumper at W6,
missing for E LC/UC Selection. W7, W8, W9 or W10
(refer to Section 6 for
details).
XXXX0X0 X F5 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot turn Replace Switch Lock
off Opto-isolator U12. I/O Board.
XXXX0XX 0 F6 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot verify Replace Switch Lock
digital data from U23 to turn off Opto- I/O Board.
isolator U12.
XXXX0XX X F7 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot verify Replace Switch Lock
digital data from U23 to turn on Unlock I/O Board.
Request Input.
XXXXX00 0 F8 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot verify Replace Switch Lock
digital data from U23 to turn on Remote I/O Board.
Overlay Input.
XXXXX00 X F9 SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot verify Replace Switch Lock
digital data from U23 to turn on NWP I/O Board.
Input.
XXXXX0X 0 FA SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD cannot verify Replace Switch Lock
digital data via U24 to control outputs. I/O Board.
XXXXX0X X FB SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD state check Replace Switch Lock
for PBKE LMP OUT output has failed. I/O Board.
XXXXXX0 0 FC SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD state check Replace Switch Lock
for OL RLY OUT output has failed. I/O Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-17 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table 12-2. Error Code Diagnostics (cont.)

Error Error Failure Remedy

Code Number

XXXXXX0 X FD SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD state check Replace Switch Lock
for LK RLY OUT output has failed. I/O Board.
XXXXXXX 0 FE SWITCH LOCK I/O BOARD state check Replace Switch Lock
for OUTPUT (expansion output) has failed. I/O Board.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-18 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 PC1 WEST RECEIVER CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT
PC2 WEST DECODE OUTPUT

PC3 WEST VPC

OUT+ OUT- VPC

E-W CODE SELECT

PC4

REGULATOR FILTER
PC5

PC6 AUX I/O

WCA

WEX

WAUX
ECA
EEX

EAUX EEX1 WEX1

O

O
B

IN IN
CPU
PC7
W CODES OUT

W CODES IN
WEST STATUS
E CODES OUT
EAST STATUS

E CODES IN
POR
RST

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

PC8 EAST VPC

OUT+ OUT- VPC

PC9 EAST DECODE OUT

PC10 EAST RECEIVER/CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

Figure 12-1. LED/Test Point Arrangement Control Point

P2160A Vol. 1 12-19 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 PC1 WEST RECEIVER CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

PC2 WEST SEARCHLIGHT (COLORLIGHT)

PC3 WEST VPC

OUT+ OUT- VPC

PC4 REGULATOR FILTER

PC5 AUX I/O

WEXO
WCAB
ECAB

WAUX
EEX

EAUX EEX1 WEX1

O

IN IN

PC6 CPU
W CODES OUT

W CODES IN
WEST STATUS
E CODES OUT
EAST STATUS

E CODES IN
POR
BLO
ALO

BLO
ALO
TRK
STK

RST

TRK
STK
INP

INP

C8
C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

RST SW2
TST SW1

PC7 EAST VPC

OUT+ OUT- VPC

PC8 EAST SEARCHLIGHT (COLOR LIGHT)

PC9 EAST RECEIVER/CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

Figure 12-2. LED/Test Point Arrangement Intermediate Module

P2160A Vol. 1 12-20 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 PC1 WEST RECEIVER CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT
PC2

PC3 WEST VPC

OUT+ OUT- VPC

PC4

PC5 REGULATOR FILTER

PC6 AUX I/O

WCA

WEX

WAUX
EEX

ECA

EAUX EEX1 WEX1

O

O
B

IN IN

CPU
PC7
W CODES OUT

W CODES IN
WEST STATUS
E CODES OUT
EAST STATUS

E CODES IN
POR
RST

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

PC8

PC9

PC10 EAST RECEIVER/CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

Figure 12-3. LED/Test Point Arrangement Repeater Module

P2160A Vol. 1 12-21 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 PC1 WEST RECEIVER CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

PC2 SWITCH LOCK I/O

RMTE OL

UN REQ
NWP
WB
WA

OT
EB
EA

OL
ST

LR
LP
PC3 WEST VPC

OUT+ OUT- VPC

PC4 REGULATOR FILTER

PC5 AUX I/O

WEXO
WCAB
EEXO

ECAB

WEX1
EAUX

WAUX
EEX1
IN

IN
PC6 CPU
W CODES OUT

W CODES IN
WEST STATUS
E CODES OUT
EAST STATUS

E CODES IN
POR
BLO
ALO

BLO
ALO
TRK
STK

RST

TRK
STK
INP

INP

C8
C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

RST SW2
TST SW1

PC7 TIMER

PC8 SERIES OVERLAY

COM
SEN

OUT
OL

OL

PC9 EAST RECEIVER/CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

Figure12-4. LED/Test Point Arrangement Switch Lock Module

P2160A Vol. 1 12-22 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 PC1 DRIVER

CODE DRIVE FFO +12V CODE CR OUT

PC2 OSC/FILTER

+12V 200Hz COM

Figure12-5. LED and Test Point Locations for Cab Signal Module Boards.

P2160A Vol. 1 12-23 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 PC1 REGULATOR FILTER

PC2 WEST RECEIVER CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

PC3 EAST RECEIVER/CONVERTER

TEST RCV
COM +4V CODE DET XMIT

PC4 CPU

W CODES OUT

W CODES IN
WEST STATUS
E CODES OUT
EAST STATUS

E CODES IN
POR
BLO
ALO

BLO
ALO
TRK
STK

RST

TRK
STK
INP

INP

C8
C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

C8
C7
C6
C4
C3
C2
C1

RST SW2
TST SW1
PC9 E - W CODE SELECT

Figure12-6. LED and Test Point Locations for Test Unit Boards

P2160A Vol. 1 12-24 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 APPENDIX A

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTROL POINT MODULE

Input Power Requirements:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9.0 12.0 16.0
Single direction Current (A dc)*: 0.5 0.6 0.7
Double direction Current (A dc)*: 0.8 0.9 1.0

* Note: These currents are the current requirements for the module electronics only. The
decoded relay current and the peak track transmit current must be added to these
values to compute the total module current requirement.

Fuses:
Output drive (FU1): 5A, type 3AG
Electronics (FU2): 5A, type 3AG

Decoded relay output drive capabilities:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9.0 12.0 16.0
Current (mA dc): 200 250 1800

Code select inputs - contact closure type:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9.0 12.0 16.0
Current (mA dc): 6 8 11

Code select inputs - DC input type:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9.0 12.0 16.0
Current (mA dc): 10 13 17

P2160A Vol. 1 A-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

INTERMEDIATE MODULE (SEARCHLIGHT AND COLOR/POSITION LIGHT)

Input Power Requirements:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9.0 12.0 16.0
Current dark (A dc)*: 1.5 1.4 1.3

*Note: This current does not include the transmit current or the current requirements for
the lamp drive outputs. Total input current for an Intermediate Module is a
function of the number and wattage of lamps driven. To compute the nominal 12
V DC input current, sum the TOTAL lamp current for all lamps driven at any one
time (both EAST and WEST) and multiply by 1.25. Then add the dark value
indicated in the above chart.

Fuses:
Output drive (FU1): 30A, type 3AG slow-blow
Electronics (FU2): 5A, type 3AG

Lamp output drive capabilities - Color/Position Light:

min. nominal max.

Regulated -
Lamp Voltage (dc): 12.0 12.0 12.0
Lamp Wattage (W): 5 18 25

Note: Dropping-resistors are required at the signal head (1 per lamp) to adjust each lamp
voltage for 10 V dc.

Note: A maximum of 3 - 25 watt bulbs can be simultaneously lit per direction (6 - 25 W

bulbs max per module).

Lamp output drive capabilities - Searchlight:

min. nominal max.

Regulated -
Lamp Voltage (dc): 12.0 12.0 12.0
Lamp Wattage (W): 5 18 25

Note: Dropping resistors are required at the signal head (1 per lamp) to adjust each lamp
voltage for 10 V dc.

Note: A maximum of 2 - 25 watt bulbs can be simultaneously lit per direction (4 - 25 W

bulbs maximum per module).

P2160A Vol. 1 A-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Note: A maximum of 2 mechanisms can be simultaneously driven per direction (4 -
mechanisms maximum per module).

min. nominal max.

Regulated Mechanism
Voltage (dc): 12.0 12.0 12.0
Coil Resistance (ohms): 100 200 1800

min. nominal max.

Check Inputs
Voltage (dc): 7.5 12.0 16.0
Current (mA dc): 6 10 13

REPEATER MODULE

Input Power Requirements:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9.0 12.0 16.0

Current (A dc)*: 0.6 0.7 0.9

*Note: These currents are the current requirements for the module electronics only. The
peak track transmit current must be added to these values to compute the total
module current requirements.

Fuses:
Output drive (FU1): 5A, type 3AG
Electronics (FU2): 5A, type 3AG

Repeater Current Draw

The following data quantifies the worst case Genrakode Repeater Module current requirements
for all track transmit levels (1.5, 2.0, 3.0, and 4.0 volts) vs. Battery Voltage. The setup used
simulates a worst case current draw scenario where a train straddles the insulated joint and the
Genrakode unit is synchronously transmitting a Code 1+5 on one side and Code 7+5 on the other,
each into 0.1Ω shunts. In a realistic scenario, a Genrakode Repeater unit will transmit only on
one side into one shunt, or on two sides into unoccupied track circuits of higher than 0.1Ω
resistance.

P2160A Vol. 1 A-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table A-1. Repeater Battery Current vs. Battery Voltage
1.5 Volt Transmit Level 2.0 Volt Transmit Level
Battery Current (A) Peak Average Current (A) Peak Average
Voltage G’KODE Current (A) Current (A) G’KODE Current (A) Current (A)
(V) Not Not
Transmittin Transmittin
g g
9.0 0.529 0.996 0.622 0.529 1.329 0.689
9.5 0.547 1.067 0.651 0.547 1.427 0.723
10.0 0.561 1.148 0.678 0.561 1.521 0.753
10.5 0.578 1.191 0.701 0.578 1.618 0.786
11.0 0.591 1.258 0.724 0.591 1.684 0.810
11.5 0.605 1.338 0.752 0.605 1.752 0.834
12.0 0.619 1.406 0.776 0.619 1.872 0.870
12.5 0.631 1.458 0.796 0.631 1.991 0.903
13.0 0.645 1.552 0.826 0.645 2.032 0.922
13.5 0.659 1.619 0.851 0.659 2.152 0.958
14.0 0.673 1.660 0.870 0.673 2.246 0.988
14.5 0.689 1.729 0.897 0.689 2.342 1.020
15.0 0.705 1.798 0.924 0.705 2.438 1.052
15.5 0.722 1.842 0.946 0.722 2.562 1.090
16.0 0.739 1.952 0.982 0.739 2.606 1.112
3.0 Volt Transmit Level 4.0 Volt Transmit Level
Battery Current (A) Peak Average Current (A) Peak Average
Voltage G’KODE Current (A) Current (A) G’KODE Current (A) Current (A)
(V) Not Not
Transmittin Transmittin
g g
9.0 0.529 2.689 0.961 0.529 3.729 1.169
9.5 0.547 2.974 1.032 0.547 3.987 1.235
10.0 0.561 3.201 1.089 0.561 4.214 1.292
10.5 0.578 3.378 1.138 0.578 4.418 1.346
11.0 0.591 3.578 1.188 0.591 4.671 1.407
11.5 0.605 3.725 1.229 0.605 4.925 1.469
12.0 0.619 3.926 1.280 0.619 5.206 1.536
12.5 0.631 4.098 1.324 0.631 5.431 1.591
13.0 0.645 4.298 1.376 0.645 5.658 1.648
13.5 0.659 4.446 1.416 0.659 5.939 1.715
14.0 0.673 4.620 1.462 0.673 6.220 1.782
14.5 0.689 4.796 1.510 0.673 6.326 1.804
15.0 0.705 5.025 1.569 - - -
15.5 0.722 5.202 1.618 - - -
16.0 0.739 5.379 1.667 - - -

P2160A Vol. 1 A-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Repeater Average Battery Current Draw vs. Battery Voltage

2.500
Avg. Battery Current (A)

2.000

1.5 Volts
1.500 2.0 Volts
3.0 Volts
1.000 4.0 Volts
Trend Line

0.500

0.000
9.0

9.5

10.0

10.5

11.0

11.5

12.0

12.5

13.0

13.5

14.0

14.5

15.0

15.5

16.0
Battery Voltage (V)

Repeater Peak Battery Current Draw vs. Battery Voltage

8.000
Peak Battery Current (A)

7.000

6.000
1.5 Volts
5.000
2.0 Volts
4.000 3.0 Volts
4.0 Volts
3.000
Trend Line
2.000

1.000

0.000
9.0

9.5

10.0

10.5

11.0

11.5

12.0

12.5

13.0

13.5

14.0

14.5

15.0

15.5

16.0

Battery Voltage (V)

P2160A Vol. 1 A-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

SWITCH LOCK MODULE

Input Power Requirements:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9.0 12.0 16.0

Current (A dc)*: 0.6 0.7 0.9

*Note: These currents are the current requirements for the module electronics only. The
output(s) drive current and the peak track transmit current must be added to these
values to compute the total module current requirements.

Fuses:
Output drive (FU1): 10A, type 3AG
Electronics (FU2): 5A, type 3AG

Lock mechanism output drive capabilities:

min. nominal max.

Regulated -
Voltage (dc): 12.0 12.0 12.0
Coil Load (ohms): 50 200 1800

Remote overlay output:

min. nominal max.

Regulated -
Voltage (dc): 12.0 12.0 12.0
Coil Load (ohm): 50 200 1800

Lock request lamp output:

min. nominal max.
Regulated -
Lamp Voltage (dc): 12.0 12.0 12.0
Lamp Wattage (W): 5 18 25

Unlock request input:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (mA dc): 7 10 13

P2160A Vol. 1 A-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

NWP input:
min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (mA dc): 7 10 13

Remote overlay input:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (mA dc): 7 10 13

Unlock codes select:

EAST and WEST unlock codes are jumper selectable.

Lock timing:
minimum maximum

Field Programmable Timer: 0 seconds 59 min. 59 sec.

Time Select Resolution: 1 second

Repeater section:
The Switch Lock Module contains all the repeater functions. Refer to the repeater section for
specifications regarding this function.

Decoded relay outputs: (Optional)

min. nominal max.

Regulated
Voltage (dc): 12.0 12.0 12.0
Coil Load (ohms): 50 200 1800

Push-button input: (Optional)

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (mA dc): 7 10 13

P2160A Vol. 1 A-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

CAB SIGNAL MODULE

Input Power Requirements:

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (A dc)*: 5.4 6.8 8.6

*Note: This is the current when driving a 0.5 ohm load at 100% power.

Fuses:

Electronics (FU1): 5A, type 3AG

Output drive (FU2): 15A, type 3AG

SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL MODULES

Transmitted Codes

Cycle time (period): 2.8 seconds

Note: The pulse spacing (indicated in the middle column below) is from rising edge of 1st
pulse to rising edge of 2nd pulse.

Table A-2. Transmit Code Timing

CODE 1st pulse width pulse spacing 2nd pulse width

1 112 --- --- ms
1&7 112 224 112 ms
1&4 112 320 112 ms
1&3 112 496 112 ms
1&2 112 688 112 ms
1&8 112 944 112 ms
6 600 --- --- ms
1&5 224 --- --- ms
1&7&5 112 224 224 ms
1 & 4 & 5* 112 320 224 ms
1&3&5 224 496 112 ms
1&2&5 224 688 112 ms
1&8&5 224 944 112 ms

*Note: The Repeater Module adds code 5 (224 ms) to the first pulse of the transmitted
code.

P2160A Vol. 1 A-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Decoding Tolerances

Note: The pulse spacing is from rising edge of 1st pulse to rising edge of 2nd pulse.

Table A-3. Transmit Code Tolerances

CODE 1st pulse width pulse spacing 2nd pulse width

min. max. min. max. min. max.
1 64 160 --- --- --- --- ms
1&7 64 160 176 256 64 160 ms
1&4 64 160 288 368 64 160 ms
1&3 64 160 448 544 64 160 ms
1&2 64 160 640 736 64 160 ms
1&8 64 160 896 992 64 160 ms
6 496 704 --- --- --- --- ms
1&5 176 272 --- --- --- --- ms
1&7&5 64 160 176 256 176 272 ms
1 & 4 & 5* 64 160 288 368 176 272 ms
1&3&5 176 272 448 544 64 160 ms
1&2&5 176 272 640 736 64 160 ms
1&8&5 176 272 896 992 64 160 ms

*Note: Code 5 will also be decoded if the first pulse is within the 224 ms range and the
second pulse is within the 112 ms range.

Code pick-up:

All codes, except code 6, must be received twice before they will be decoded if code 1 is
decoded. 3 receptions of a vital code (7, 4, 3, 2, 8) are required if code 1 is not decoded (from a
shunted to an unshunted track). Code 5 and 6 requires only one reception. Pick up of a new
code will drop the previously decoded code.

Code drop:

Any decoded code, is dropped if it is not received 2 out of 3 cycles. Code 6 causes all codes
except codes 1 and 5 to drop after 1 cycle (tumble down).

Signal drop time:

Time for a signal to go to stop (RED)after the tracks are shunted.

P2160A Vol. 1 A-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Minimum time: 4.2 seconds
Maximum time: 5.6 seconds

Tumble down time:

Time from reception of a code 6 on one side of an Intermediate Module to transmission of a code
6 on the other side of the module.

minimum time: 1.4 seconds

maximum time: 4.2 seconds
average time: 2.8 seconds

Cab Signal Rates

Duty cycle: 50%, tolerance: 1.5%

RATE PULSE / MIN.

50 50.0
75 75.0
120 121.0
180 178.6
270 267.9
420 416.7

Cab Signal Output (E CAB, W CAB)

Voltage: Current sink (active low) output referenced to VPC energy (LAMP+, RLY, or
VPC+ terminal)

Current: 60 mA DC max.

Track Length vs. Cab Signal Power Setting

OUTPUT
RAIL LENGTH (ft) POWER SETTING

0 to 1000 25%
1000 to 3500 50%
3500 to 6000 80%
6000 to 7500 100%

P2160A Vol. 1 A-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 CAUTION

For steady cab do not use the 100% power setting because if the module is
operated too long an internal PC board may overheat and fail.

Auxiliary Output (E EXO, W EXO)

Voltage: Current sink (active low) output referenced to VPC energy (LAMP+, RLY, or
VPC+ terminal)

Current: 60 mA DC max.

Auxiliary Input (+E AUX, +W AUX)

Two 2-wire inputs, one EAST and one WEST

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (mA dc): 7 10 13

Auxiliary Input (E EXI, W EXI)

Two 1-wire inputs, one EAST and one WEST; input voltage comes from VPC energy.

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (mA dc): 7 10 13

Ac Power Detect Input

min. nominal max.

Voltage (dc): 9 12 16
Current (mA dc): 2 3 4

Voltage (V ac rms): 100 120 140

Current (mA rms): 3 4 5

P2160A Vol. 1 A-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Flashing Aspects (Intermediate Module only)

Any aspect can be flashed at a customer specified rate. All lamps for a given direction
(EAST/WEST) flash synchronously.

Approach Lighting (Intermediate Module only)

Software options allow: 1) lighting signals continuously, 2) approach lighting, or 3) approach

lighting only when ac power is lost.

Directional Stick Logic (intermediate module only)

Stick logic is provided to allow following moves without the use of external relays. See Section 4
for more details.

Track Converter Characteristics

The Track Converter (Gr.1 bd) has 4 screw switches providing 4 voltage levels for the pulses
applied to the rails: 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, and 4.0 volts (into a 1 ohm load). The Line Wire Converter
(Gr.2 bd) has 4 screw switches providing 4 voltage levels for the pulses applied to the line wire:
3.0, 4.0, 6.0, and 8.0 volts (into a 1 ohm load).

Table A-4. Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection for Track Converter (59473-833-01)

OUTPUT VOLTAGE (VOLTS) PRIMARY TAPS SECONDARY TAPS

1.5 L-L 1.5/2.0, 1.5/2.0
2.0 H-H 1.5/2.0, 1.5/2.0
3.0 L-L 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0
4.0 H-H 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0

Table A-5. Output Voltage vs. Tap Selection for Line Wire Converter (59473-833-02).

OUTPUT VOLTAGE (VOLTS) PRIMARY TAPS SECONDARY TAPS

3.0 L-L 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0
4.0 H-H 3.0/4.0, 3.0/4.0
6.0 L-L 6.0/8.0, 8.0/6.0
8.0 H-H 6.0/8.0, 8.0/6.0

P2160A Vol. 1 A-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 WARNING

The 59473-833-02 Converter/Receiver Line Driver board is only intended to

be used for line wire applications and must not be used in applications for
normal track operation. Usage may result in an unfavorable excess track
current in the receiver board, causing the inability to detect trains in the track
circuit.

Receiver Characteristics

The Track Receiver (59473-833-01) has 3 screw switches providing 7 levels of receiver input
resistance: 0, 0.27, 0.56, 0.83, 1.09, 1.38, and 1.65 ohms. A nominal module resistance of 0.36
ohms must be added to these resistances for determining total module resistance.

Receiver sensitivity: pick/drop - 0.5 A DC

60 Hz rejection: 10 V ac rms rail-to-rail

Table A-6. Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions (59473-833-01).

TOTAL RECEIVER
RESISTANCE SWITCH POSITION
(ohms) SS1 SS2 SS3
0 in in in
0.27 in out in
0.56 out in in
0.83 out out in
0.82 in in out
1.09 in out out
1.38 out in out
1.65 out out out
Module Resistance (Ohms)
0.36

P2160A Vol. 1 A-13 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

The Line Wire Receiver (59473-833-02) has 3 screw switches providing 8 levels of receiver input
resistance: 0, 0.56, 1.00, 1.56, 2.00, 2.56, 3.00, and 3.56 ohms. A nominal module resistance of
0.50 ohms must be added to these resistances for determining total module resistance.

Receiver sensitivity: pick/drop - 0.25 A DC

60 Hz rejection: 10 V ac rms rail-to-rail

Table A-7. Receiver Input Resistance and Switch Positions (59473-833-02).

TOTAL RECEIVER
RESISTANCE SWITCH POSITION
(ohms) SS1 SS2 SS3
0 in in in
0.56 in out in
1.00 out in in
1.56 out out in
2.00 in in out
2.56 in out out
3.00 out in out
3.56 out out out
Module Resistance (Ohms)
0.50

Recommended Wiring to Module

-Battery connections to the module should be made with AWG #10 or larger wire.
-Module to rail connection - #6 wire @ 0.4 ohm per 1000 feet
-Connections from the modules to signal lights should be made with at least AWG #10 wire @
1.0 ohm per 1000 feet.
-For other communications, outputs to relays or inputs such as code selects or auxiliary vital
inputs, use AWG #16 or larger wire.
-AWG #6 twisted pair should be used to connect the module series overlay input/output to the
rails. The Series Overlay Board can accommodate up to 500 feet of AWG #6 twisted pair.

P2160A Vol. 1 A-14 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

If AWG #9 twisted pair is used, the lead length should not exceed 300 feet. (Twisted pair to have
a minimum of 1 twist per foot).
- AWG #6 twisted pair should be used for line wire between Genrakode modules (used with Gr. 2
Converter/Receiver Bd.) for distances up to 15000 ft. (Twisted pair to have a minimum of 1 twist
per foot).

Recommended Track/Line Wire Current

Receive track current should be adjusted to fall between 1.0 and 1.4 amperes.
Under normal weather, the current should be adjusted to about 1.2 amperes.
Receive line wire current should be adjusted to fall between 0.5 and 0.7 amperes.

Maximum Track Circuit Length (Converter/Receiver 59473-833-01)

Railhead bonded rail @ 0.05 ohms/1000 ft rail resistance:

11000 ft @ 3 ohms DC ballast

15000 ft @ 5 ohms DC ballast
21000 ft @ 10 ohms DC ballast

Heavy welded rail @ 0.015 ohms/1000 ft rail resistance:

14000 ft @ 3 ohms DC ballast

20000 ft @ 5 ohms DC ballast
29000 ft @ 10 ohms DC ballast

The table below lists a convenient starting point for converter output voltages and receiver
inputresistances for given lengths of tracks at 3, 5, and 10 ohm (per 1000 ft.) ballast resistances
for bonded or welded rails.

Table A-8. Transmit and Receive Settings for Rail Lengths.

MINIMUM BALLAST RCVR

RESISTANCE RESISTANCE
XMIT OUTPUT RAIL LENGTH (FT)
(Ohms/1000 FT) VOLTAGE (Volts) (Ohms)
BONDED WELDED
10 1.5 0.27 under 8000 under 11000
10 1.5 0.00 8000 to 11000 to
11500 17000

P2160A Vol. 1 A-15 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table A-8. Transmit and Receive Settings for Rail Lengths. (cont.)

MINIMUM BALLAST RCVR

RESISTANCE RESISTANCE
XMIT OUTPUT RAIL LENGTH (FT)
(Ohms)
(Ohms/1000 FT) VOLTAGE (Volts)
BONDED WELDED
10 2.0 0.00 11500 to 17000 to
16000 23000
10 3.0 0.27 16000 to 23000 to
21000 29000
5 1.5 0.27 under 5500 under 7500
5 1.5 0.00 5500 to 8500 7500 to 12000
5 2.0 0.00 8500 to 12000 to
12000 18000
5 3.0 0.27 12000 to 18000 to
15000 20000
3 1.5 0.27 under 4000 under 5000
3 1.5 0.00 4000 to 6500 5000 to 10000
3 2.0 0.00 6500 to 10000 to
11000 14000

Table A-9. Track Lead Increases vs. Track Length Reductions.

Track circuit adjustments are based on 50-foot track leads

RAIL LENGTH REDUCTION (FT)

PER ADDITIONAL 100 FT. OF TRACK LEAD
Ballast (ohms) Bonded Welded
3 700 1100
5 800 1300
10 900 1500

P2160A Vol. 1 A-16 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Maximum Line Wire Circuit Length (Converter/Receiver 59473-833-02)

Table A-10. Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (6 Gauge).

For AWG #6 Only

XMIT VOLTS RCVR RES WIRE LENGTH
(V) (Ohms) (Ft.)
3.00 2.00 under 2000
3.00 0.00 2000 to 4000
4.00 0.56 4000 to 6000
6.00 2.00 6000 to 8000
6.00 0.56 8000 to 10000
8.00 2.00 10000 to 12000
8.00 0.56 12000 to 14000
8.00 0.00 14000 to 15000

Table A-11. Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (8 Gauge).

AWG #8 Only
XMIT VOLTS RCVR RES WIRE LENGTH
(V) (Ohms) (Ft.)
3.00 1.00 under 2000
4.00 0.00 2000 to 4000
6.00 1.00 4000 to 6000
8.00 1.56 6000 to 8000
8.00 0.00 8000 to 9400

P2160A Vol. 1 A-17 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Table A-12. Transmit and Receive Settings for Wire Lengths (10 Gauge).

AWG #10 Only

XMIT VOLTS RCVR RES WIRE LENGTH
(V) (Ohms) (Ft.)
3.00 0.56 under 1500
4.00 0.00 1500 to 2500
6.00 1.00 2500 to 3500
8.00 0.00 3500 to 5500

Lightning Protection

Primary lightning protection must be provided external to the module. Equalizers and arrestors
are required for the signal battery and track circuit leads. Arrestors are recommended for inputs
and outputs that travel on open line wires and/or over long distances and may be subjected to
primary lightning strikes or high surge levels. All inputs and output circuits contain surge
protection to guard against system malfunction and/or damage from surges that would normally
be present at a typical signal location.

Audio Frequency Compatibility:

Genrakode modules have internal filters that allow operation on the same track circuit with other
equipment. The following two columns show frequency versus track input impedance data for
the Genrakode module to facilitate consideration of compatibility for specific applications.

FREQUENCY (Hz) IMPEDANCE (ohms)

DC 2
60 13
150 8
200 11
300 16
500 25
1000 45

P2160A Vol. 1 A-18 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Environmental

Temperature range: -40 degrees F to +158 degrees F

-40 degrees C to +70 degrees C
meeting AAR temperature requirements.

Physical Specifications

All Modules Except Cab

Signal Modules Cab Signal Module

length: 19.0 inches (48.3 cm) 12.0 inches (30.5 cm)

width: 10.1 inches (25.7 cm) 10.1 inches (25.7 cm)
height: 15.0 inches (38.1 cm) 14.5 inches (36.8 cm)
weight: 28.0 pounds (12.7 kg) 29.0 pounds (13.2 kg)

The module can be either shelf- or wall-mounted.

Connections

All external connections to Genrakode are made with AAR terminals mounted at the top of the
module. A power switch is provided to remove battery energy from the module.

ACCESSORIES

Current Test Board (59473-890-01)

A small printed circuit board which can be attached to the track lead AAR posts provides a
convenient means of opening the track leads (one for the EAST direction, one for the WEST) for
testing and adjustment purposes. This board is depicted in Section 1, Volume 2.

Extender Board (59473-850-01)

An extender board is available which can be inserted in any board slot in any module for
troubleshooting and testing purposes. This board is depicted in Section 1, Volume 2.

P2160A Vol. 1 A-19 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

60 Hz Filter (42560-276-01)

A 60 Hz filter is available which is inserted in series with the track leads to provide greater 60 Hz
rejection. This is depicted in Section 1, Volume 2.

100 Hz Filter (42560-276-02)

A 100 Hz filter is available which is inserted in series with the track leads to provide 100 Hz
rejection. This is used at a location where 100 Hz cab signal is present on the rails and there is no
Cab Signal Module being used. This is depicted in Section 1, Volume 2.

Motion Sensor Filter (42560-278-01)

The motion sensor filter is inserted in series with the track leads to reduce the effects of the
Genrakode pulses on the operation of motion sensors and grade crossing predictors. For
maximum reduction of interference, a filter should be used at both ends of a track circuit
containing all or part of an approach circuit.

Track Current Test Unit (20182-100-01)

The Track Current Test unit is a battery operated, hand held device used to accurately measure
the track circuit current. The unit is placed in series with one of the track leads from the
Genrakode module, and the output is connected to any type of voltmeter. The unit determines
the peak current flowing, holds this value, and generates a voltage output proportional to the
track circuit current. A 1 volt output equals 1 amp of track current. A polarity switch allows
both the transmit and receive currents to be measured and an auto-shut off circuit insures long
battery life.

P2160A Vol. 1 A-20 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

P2160A Vol. 1
LOC. 7 LOC. 6 LOC. 5 LOC. 4 LOC. 3 LOC. 2 LOC. 1

A A
B A
E B B
W
TRACK 1 W + -
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ - W
SINGLE D C TRACK 1
TRACK + - + - + -
E + - + - E DOUBLE
B E E
B B TRACK
A A TRACK 2
1E - W A
TE WBE W
C D

EBE 1 WBE

EB SIG
R/R
R/Y
R/G
TYPICAL APPLICATION CIRCUITS

SW SW. LOCK
& E
REP. CUT SIG E SIG

REP. CUT E SIG W SIG SH

EA SIG R
SW SW

B-1
H(2) R/R
D(4) Y/R R H(2) H(2) R(S )
N N R/R (S )
TRACK G/R D(4) Y H(2) H(2)
1 N N N
D(4) G D(4) D(4) Y/R AH(2) AH(2) R/R
N N/R
T(1)
APPENDIX B

G/R AD(4) AD(4) Y/R AH(2)

N
G/R AD(4) TRACK
N
ABK(5) 1
W Y/G BD(3) BD(3) R/Y BH(2)
R
SIG R/G BD(4) TRACK
R
BBK(5) 2

SW BK(5) BK(5) BK(5) BK(5) T(1) T(1)

N N

SW. LOCK
& W REP. CUT E SIG W SIG SW WA SIG
REP. CUT SIG
R/R (2)H
(S ) R (2)H N Y/R (4)D
SW TRACK
SW (S ) R/R (2)H (2)H (2)H Y (4)D G/R
N 1
R/R (2)H Y/R (4)D (4)D (4)D G N (1)T
N N
R/G (3)BD Y/G

Figure B-1. Track Layout Example: Code and Aspect Chart

R N R
(2)H Y/R (4)AD G/R WD SIG
N N R
(4)D G/R R/R (2)H
TRACK N E SIG R/Y (3)D
1
TRACK
(1)T (1)T (1)T (5)BK (5)BK (5)BK (5)BK R/G
N N 2
(1)T

ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LOC. 1 A B

WT W EAT
Searchlight Signals E C D
B A W EBT

Genrakode II
Control Point Module
W EA
H 2-2 2-14 H
3B 3A
WHR EHR 3A 3B
3 3
3E 3C 3C 3E
D D
W EA
D 3-4 W D
E 3-16
3B 3A
C4RL 3A 3B
C4RLY
3 Y 3
3E 3C 3C 3E
D D
W EA
BK 2-1 2-13 BK
W E
3B 3A C5RLY C5RLY 3A 3B
3 3
3C 3C
3E D D 3E

1-4 W
E 1-13
RLY+ RLY+
** W EA **
F B12 1-1 1-16 N12 F
B N
DS 3-7
TP * W E 3-10 * DS
AUX+ AUX- TP
W * 3-9 E W 3-8 * E
AS AUX+ AUX- AS
TBDN 1-6 W E 1-10 TBDN
CNT6 CNT6 RWC

W 3-6 W E 3-12
F
**
CNT1 CNT1 EA **
F RWC
W DS
AS TP 3-5 3-11 DS E
W E TP AS
REF REF
2-7 W E 2-12 WA
EA EA EB EB CNT4 CNT4
YGP WA
LD YGP LD YGP 2-6 W E 2-10 LD
CNT3 CNT2
2-5 W
CNT2
WRB 1-2 W 1-14 EARB
E
TK+ TK+
WRN 1-3 W E 1-15 EARN
TK- TK-

** Contact to be * Jumpers required

wired if Traffic is when AUX board is
used. used.

Figure B-2. Location 1: Control Point Module Driving Searchlight Signals

P2160A Vol. 1 B-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LOC. 1 A B

WT W EAT
Searchlight Signals E C D
B A W EBT

Genrakode II
Control Point Module
EB
2-14 H
EHR 3A 3B
3
3C 3E
D
EB
3-16 D
E
C4RLY 3A 3B
3
3C 3E
D
EB
2-13 BK
E
C5RLY 3A 3B
3
3C
D 3E

1-13
E
RLY+ EB **
B12 1-1 1-16 N12 F
B N
3-7
* W E 3-10 * DS
AUX+ AUX- TP

* 3-9 E W 3-8 * E
AUX+ AUX- AS
E 1-10 TBDN
CNT6 NWC

E 3-12
CNT1 EB **
F NWC

3-11 DS E
E TP AS
REF
E 2-11
WD
CNT3
YGP WD WC
E 2-10 LD LD
CNT2

1-14 EBRB
E
TK+
E 1-15 EBRN
TK-

** Contact to be * Jumpers required

wired if Traffic is when AUX board is
used. used.

Figure B-3. Location 1: Control Point Module Driving Searchlight Signals

P2160A Vol. 1 B-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LOC. 2

W
WT + - ET
Colorlight Signals - +

Genrakode II
Intermediate Signal Point Module

1-16 N12
N
3-10 *
E
AUX-
W 3-8 *
AUX-
2-9 NX110
POWER
DETECT *
-

B12 1-1
B
3-7
* W
AUX+
* 3-9 E
AUX+
BX110 2-8 POWER
W DETECT
* +
SIGNAL
G 2-4
LAMP 1W

Y 2-5
LAMP 2W
2-6
R
LAMP 3W

1-7
WEST
LAMP+

WRB 1-2 1-14 ERB

W E
TK+ TK+
WRN 1-3 W 1-15 ERN
E
TK- TK-

* Jumpers required
when AUX board is
used.

Figure B-4. Location 2: Intermediate Module Driving Staggered Colorlight Signal

P2160A Vol. 1 B-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LOC. 3

WT - + ET
Colorlight Signals + -
E
B A

Genrakode II
Intermediate Signal Point Module

1-16
N12
N
3-10 *
E
AUX-
W 3-8 *
AUX-
POWER 2-9 NX110
DETECT
- *

B12 1-1
B
3-7
* W
AUX+
* 3-9 E
AUX+
BX110 2-8 POWER
EA
DETECT SIGNAL
* +
2-11 G
LAMP 1E
2-12 Y
LAMP 2E
2-13
R
LAMP 3E

1-11
G
LAMP 4E
1-13
R
LAMP 6E

1-10
EAST
LAMP+

WRB 1-2 1-14 ERB

W E
TK+ TK+
WRN 1-3 W 1-15 ERN
E
TK- TK-

* Jumpers required
when AUX board is
used.

Figure B-5. Location 3: Intermediate Module Driving Staggered Colorlight Signal

P2160A Vol. 1 B-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 LOC. 4

WT + - ET
+ -
Rep. Cut

B12 1-1 1-16 N12

B N
3-7 3-10
* W E *
AUX+ AUX-
3-9 3-8
* E W *
AUX+ AUX-

WRB 1-2 W 1-14 ERB

E
TK+ TK+
WRN 1-3 W E 1-15 ERN
TK- TK-

* Jumpers required when

AUX board is used.

Figure B-6. Location 4: Demonstrating Application of Repeater

P2160A Vol. 1 B-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 A B LOC. 5
W
WT - + ET
- +
Searchlight Signals
E

Genrakode II
Double Intermediate
Module

B12 1-1 1-16 N12

B N
3-7 3-8
W W
AUX+ AUX-
BX110 2-8 POWER 2-9 NX110
DETEC
** T ***
2-4
WA
+ SW. C.C.
+COIL B12
WA 3-10
SIG E
2-5 AUX-
- WA
-COIL
1-4
WB N12
+ 3-9
+COIL E
WB AUX+
SIG
1-5
- WB
-COIL
EA 2-11
+COIL WB
B
EA 2-12 SIG
-COIL
WA SIG
B12 EB 2-14 B12
1P 2P RG
3-1 E SIG
WA
B12
1D 1R 2N 2D RG 1P 2P
3-2
WA
HG
WB SIG 1D 1R 2N
3-3 3-16
B12 WA EA
1P 2P
DG DG
2-1 3-15
WB EA
1D 1R 2N 2D RG HG
2-3 3-14
WB EA
WA SIG DG RG
2-6 2-13
WA EA
WB SIG LAMP LAMP
E SIG
1-6 1-10
WB E
LAMP LAMP+
1-7 W
LAMP+
WRB 1-2 W 1-14 ERB
E
TK+ TK+
WRN 1-3 W E 1-15 ERN
TK- TK-

** B12 If power detect ** N12 If power detect

is not desired. is not desired.

Figure B-7. Location 5: Intermediate Module Driving Searchlight

P2160A Vol. 1 B-7 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 .
WT + - ET
- +

LOC. 6

With Series Overlay

SW. C. C.
2-3
-NWP

N12
2-2
+NWP
B12
E. REL 9B SW
LOCK
1-7
+VPC

LOCK 1-5
RLY
REQUEST B12
UNLOCK 1-4
REQUES
T
B12 1-1 1-16 N12
B N

* 2-10 W 2-11
W *
AUX+ AUX-
2-14 E 2-15 *
* E
AUX+ AUX-

WTB 1-2 W 1-14 ETB

E
TK+ Motion
TK+
Filter
WTN 1-3 W 1-15 (If Req’d)
E
TK- TK-
1-13 ETN
OL/RCVR
TK-

* Jumpers required
when AUX board is
used.

Figure B-8. Location 6: Switchlock Module Application (Typical)

P2160A Vol. 1 B-8 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 E A B
D C W
WT ET Searchlight Signals
E
B A LOC. 7

Genrakode II
Control Point Module
W E
T 3-1 2-14 H
W
3B 3A EHR 3A 3B
C1RLY
3 3
3E 3C 3C 3E
D D
W E
H 2-2 E 3-16 D
3B 3A
WHR C4RL 3A 3B
3 Y 3
3E 3C 3C 3E
D D
W E
D 3-4 2-13 BK
W E
3B 3A C4RLY C5RLY 3A 3B
3 3
3C 3C
3E D D 3E

1-4
W E 1-13
RLY+ RLY+
** W E **
F B12 1-1 1-16 N12 F
B N
3-7 3-10 DS
DS * W E * TP
TP AUX+ AUX-
3-9 E W 3-8 * E
W *
AUX+ AUX- AS
AS
TBDN 1-6 W E 1-10 TBDN
RWC CNT6 CNT6

3-6 W E 3-12 E
** F
** W CNT1 CNT1
RWC F
DS E
W DS 3-5 3-11 TP AS
AS TP W E
REF REF
2-7 W E 2-12
EA
CNT4 CNT4 WB WB WA WA
EA YGP
2-5 W GP LD YGP LD
LD E 2-11
CNT2 CNT3
E 2-10
CNT2
1-2
WRB W W 1-14 ERB
TK+ TK+
WRN 1-3 W E 1-15 ERN
TK- TK-

* Jumpers required ** Contact to be

when AUX board is wired if Traffic is
used. used.

Figure B-9. Location 7: Control Point Module Driving Searchlight Signals

P2160A Vol. 1 B-9 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 Control Point Module Cab Signal Module

1-14 2-2 1-2

#16
ETK+ GCODE+ 100%

1-15 2-3 1-3

#16
E TK- GCODE- 80%
E 1-13 2-4 1-4
TR #16
E RLY+ VPC 50%
2-5 1-5
#16 2-9 #16
E CAB CAB 25%

3-13 2-6
#16 B12
E C1RLY B
#10
1-6
N12
N
#10
B12 #10 1-1 1-16 #10 N12 1-1 2-1
B N TK- TK+

3-9 3-10 #16

#16
E AUX+ E AUX-

3-7 3-8 #16 #16

#16
W AUX+ W AUX-

#10 #6

H
TO
3-12 EAST
E CNT1 TRACK
#16
3-11
#10 #6
E REF
#16
2-12 H
E CNT4
#16
2-10 #16
E CNT2
#16
1W 1W
HRAPPR LOR

Figure B-10. Cab Signal Module Application

P2160A Vol. 1 B-10 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 100 Hz filter Plate
42560-276-02

Control Point WEST Module

+ #6 #6
27359-115-06
A B

1APT 1-2
W TRK+

- #6 1-3
W TRK-

1-4
W RLY+

3-1
Coil Res. W C1RLY
200 to 1800
2-2
WHR
Coil Res. 2-4
200 to 1800
W C4RLY

3-5
W REF
Coil Res.
200 to 1800 3-6 W CNT1
3-9
3-7
Signal W AUX+ E AUX+

3-8 3-10
HR AND DR GREEN W AUX- E AUX-
HR AND DR YELLOW 1-1 1-16
#10 #10
B12 N
HR AND DR RED N12

SIG NOTE: 12 VDC POWER REQUIRES 10 AMPS AND DOES NOT

171.5 INCLUDE POWER TO DRIVE SIGNAL LIGHTS.
1 1
AG SCR HSCR B

#16
AY

AR

BR B

Figure B-11. 100 Hz External Filter Application

P2160A Vol. 1 B-11 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

P2160A Vol. 1 B-12 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 APPENDIX C

GENRAKODE TEST UNITS

Genrakode Test Unit

The Genrakode Test Unit (20182-92-01) was designed as a stand-alone test set to check
Genrakode installations. It may also be used to facilitate troubleshooting and for shop
maintenance. It is basically a dual Control Point Module without decoded output boards and
VPC boards and is mounted in a portable case. Rotary switches provide the required inputs for
code selection. Binding posts are provided for connecting the test unit to a nominal 12 V DC
source and to the track circuits. Spare slots in the card cage provide an area for storage of spare
PC boards.

The Genrakode Test Unit uses 2 Converter/Receiver Boards, a CPU Board with a special Test
Unit program, a Regulator/Filter Board and a Code Select Board. It has EAST and WEST track
filters and therefore presents the same transmit and receive impedance as all the other Genrakode
transceivers.

Note: When using the test unit to test a module with a converter/receiver (line driver)
board (59473-833-02) be sure the XMIT level of the line driver board is set to the
3.0 or 4.0 V output level. If set to the 6.0 or 8.0 V level the test unit will be
damaged.

This test unit can generate all the Genrakode codes for both EAST and WEST directions. It
receives and decodes all codes and illuminates the LEDs on the CPU Board indicating the codes
that have been decoded. EAST and WEST codes are selected independently using an EAST and
a WEST rotary switch, respectively. CODE 1 is always transmitted and one of the five vital
codes (2, 3, 4, 7, or 8) is selected by the six position rotary switch. Associated with each rotary
switch is a three position toggle switch for selecting CODE 5. Toggling this switch to the CODE
5 position causes CODE 5 to be added to the code selected by the rotary switch. The center
position is the off position for no CODE 5. This switch also causes CODE 6 to be transmitted and
overrides the selection of the rotary switch. When this switch is in the CODE 6 position, 1 pulse
of CODE 6 is transmitted, and all the following transmissions are CODE 1. Returning the switch
to the OFF (center) or CODE 5 position resumes transmission of the code selected by the rotary
switch.

The test unit requires 12 V DC power and is normally obtained by connecting to the battery
power which powers the Genrakode modules. The test unit has a power ON/OFF switch and a
five ampere fuse. Three pairs of test leads (one black and one red for each pair) with spade lugs
on one end and alligator clips on the other are provided with the test unit.

INTERPRETING LEDS ON CPU BOARD

The following page provides a correlation between the board LEDs and the functions of each.

P2160A Vol. 1 C-1 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 TEST UNIT
CPU Board LED Definition

WEST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the WEST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

WEST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the WEST track when lit
" " 5 " Codes selected but not transmitted when flashing
" " 7 " When all lit, more than 1 signal clearing code selected
" " 8 "

WEST Status : ALO N/A (off)

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP N/A (off)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK WEST track occupied when lit

RST = CPU Reset (when on) or Diagnostic mode (when flashing)

POR N/A (off)

EAST Code 1 Decoded

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes decoded from the EAST track
" " 5 "
" " 7 "
" " 8 "

EAST Code 1 Out

" " 2 "
" " 3 "
" " 4 " Codes transmitted to the EAST track when lit
" " 5 " Codes selected but not transmitted when flashing
" " 7 " When all lit, more than 1 signal clearing code selected
" " 8 "

EAST Status : ALO N/A (off)

" " : BLO N/A (off)
" " : INP N/A (off)
" " : STK N/A (off)
" " : TRK EAST track occupied when lit

Note: When the CPU is reset, all LEDs will be on, then "count down" until only the RST
LED is lit.

N/A = not applicable

P2160A Vol. 1 C-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Terminal Definitions

The Genrakode Test Unit has six binding post terminals which accept spade lugs, banana plugs or
alligator clips. Two of the posts are for 12 V DC input power (B and N). The other four posts
are for connecting the unit to the EAST and/or WEST tracks. Leads with spade lugs on one end
and alligator clips on the other end are provided with the Test Unit. These terminals are listed
below.

B Positive Battery input power terminal.

N Negative Battery input power terminal.
WEST TK+ Connection to the positive rail of the WEST track.
WEST TK- Connection to the negative rail of the WEST track.
EAST TK+ Connection to the positive rail of the EAST track.
EAST TK- Connection to the negative rail of the EAST track.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

General Information

The Genrakode Test Unit may be used to drive the EAST track, the WEST track or both tracks
simultaneously. It is primarily used to check the operation of a signal location with the reception
of the various vital codes.

Before starting the test of a location, check that the screw switches on the receiver/converter
board are set to appropriate positions.

Note: The test unit is not a vital unit. Always disconnect it from the
track as soon as the test is complete.

Procedure

1. Turn the location module power off.

2. For the track being tested, disconnect the +TK and -TK leads from the module under test
and connect them to the Test Unit +TK and -TK. If the module under test uses the
current test board, the track leads may be left connected. The nut on the test board must
be loosened and the washer pulled away from the copper conductor on the board. This
will open one of the track leads from the module under test. The test leads can then be

P2160A Vol. 1 C-3 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 used to make the track connections to the test unit.

3. Connect the 12 volt power from the track module B and N terminals to the B and N
terminals on the test unit, respectively.

4. Turn the power switch on the test unit to ON.

5. All LEDs on the CPU board will turn on and "count down" until only the RESET LED is
on. During this time, the test unit is initializing all internal parameters. This will take
about 10 seconds. Once the system is stabilized (both receiver boards passing the receiver
test), the testing may begin.

6. Select the various codes with the code select switches and observe that the location under
test responds correctly.

7. When the test is complete, turn off the test unit power and disconnect the +TK and -TK
leads.

8. Reconnect the unit under test to the track circuit.

TRACK CURRENT TEST UNIT

The Genrakode Track Current Test Unit (20182-100-01) can be used with any standard voltmeter
or multimeter to measure coded DC receive or transmit current pulses. The pulsed current input
into the test unit is changed into DC voltage and outputted to the binding posts. The test unit, a
small battery operated unit, can easily set on the Genrakode Module shelf while being used. A
layout diagram of the test unit is found in Volume 2, Section 15.

The Track Current Test Unit is connected in series with the track leads between the + rail and the
track + on the Genrakode module. It has its own input track leads. The input of the test unit is a
0.05 ohm 0.1% resistor which does not add an appreciable amount of impedance in series with the
track circuit. Current pulses are fed into a four pole, lowpass filter to eliminate noise pulses, is
amplified and peak detected. The detected DC is isolated through a buffer stage to give a low
impedance to the output terminals.

The test unit has an internal gain potentiometer which is adjusted at the factory to provide a scale
factor of 1 volt per peak amp input when the scale multiplier switch is in the X1 position.

The test unit uses six AA batteries to provide 9 volts dc. When the voltage drops below 7.3 volts,
an LED -LOW BAT- on the front panel lights. An auto shut off feature extends the life of the
batteries.

P2160A Vol. 1 C-4 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Operating Instructions

The scale multiplier switch should be in the X1 position and the RCV/XMIT switch should be in
the RCV position. To operate the test unit, follow the steps listed below.

1. Turn test unit power on by pushing POWER toggle switch to the ON (up) position. The
switch is a momentary up/down switch. After it is released, it returns to the center
position. When the power is on, the LED next to the POWER switch lights. The power
remains on for 5 minutes or until the power switch is pushed to OFF and released.

2. Set the voltmeter to DC volts and to a scale to read at least 5 volts. Connect the + lead of
the voltmeter to the + METER terminal, and the - lead of the voltmeter to the - METER
terminal. Push the RESET/NULL switch to the RESET (momentary up) position and
release. Verify meter reads zero volts.

3. If the meter does not read zero (0) volts, the test unit must be nulled. Push
RESET/NULL switch down to the NULL position. Hold the switch down and turn the
NULL ADJ knob to obtain a zero volt reading. After the null adjustment is made, release
RESET/NULL switch.

4. Disconnect the + track lead from the Genrakode module. Clip the + TRK lead (red) of the
test unit to the + lead coming from the track and the + GKD lead of the (black) test unit to
the + track terminal on the Genrakode module.

5. To measure the receive current, set the RCV/XMIT switch to the RCV position. If the
transmit current is to be measured, put the RCV/XMIT switch to the XMIT position. The
transmit current may be higher than 3 amps peak if the track circuit is long or has poor
ballast. If the voltage reading is greater than 3 volts put the scale multiplier switch to the
X2 position and double the reading obtained by the voltmeter. The RESET/NULL switch
must be momentarily set to the RESET position to make a new reading.

6. After the track current has been measured, disconnect the test unit from the track lead and
module and reconnect the + track lead to the module. Push the POWER switch to OFF
and release to turn the power off. Verify the power LED goes out.

Maintenance

The only maintenance required for the Genrakode Track Current Test Unit is to change the
batteries when the LOW BAT LED is on. Replace the batteries with alkaline long life AA
batteries.

The battery holder is mounted on the PC board which is attached to the front panel. To replace
the batteries, remove the four Phillips head screws that attach the panel to the case. The entire
test unit assembly slides out for easy access to the batteries. When replacing the batteries, be sure
to follow the + polarity markings on the PC board.

P2160A Vol. 1 C-5 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

P2160A Vol. 1 C-6 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

P2160A Vol. 1

TRACK MAINTENANCE LOG

LOCATION:
TRACK LENGTH:
TYPE OF RAIL: BONDED WELDED
CONV. SETTING: PRIMARY - - L H SECONDARY - - 4.0 2.0
RECEIVER: SS1 SS2 SS3

RECEIVER TRANSMIT TRANSMIT BATTERY SWITCH LOCK

NAME DATE COMMENTS
CURRENT CURRENT VOLTAGE VOLTS OVERLAY OUT

APPENDIX D
D-1
ALSTOM Signaling Inc.

Track Maintenance Log

 This Page Intentionally Left Blank
P2160A Vol. 1 D-2 ALSTOM Signaling Inc.